<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Koen</id>
	<title>MoodleDocs - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Koen"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/Special:Contributions/Koen"/>
	<updated>2026-04-08T07:57:34Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.5</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=question/type/stack/adminui/caschat&amp;diff=149445</id>
		<title>question/type/stack/adminui/caschat</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=question/type/stack/adminui/caschat&amp;diff=149445"/>
		<updated>2025-02-05T08:33:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: Created page with &amp;quot;More information on testing CAS can be found on https://github.com/maths/moodle-qtype_stack/blob/master/doc/en/Installation/Testing_installation.md&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;More information on testing CAS can be found on https://github.com/maths/moodle-qtype_stack/blob/master/doc/en/Installation/Testing_installation.md&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Maintaining_a_language_pack&amp;diff=148709</id>
		<title>Maintaining a language pack</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Maintaining_a_language_pack&amp;diff=148709"/>
		<updated>2024-05-30T05:55:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: /* The role of language pack maintainer */ check for outdated strings can only be done by the language pack maintainer&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Translation}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Volunteering to become a language pack maintainer==&lt;br /&gt;
If your language currently doesn&#039;t have a language pack maintainer, and you would like to volunteer, please [http://lang.moodle.org/login/signup.php create an account on the Translation site] and contact our Moodle translation coordinator, Koen Roggemans, [mailto:translation@moodle.org translation@moodle.org].&lt;br /&gt;
== The role of language pack maintainer==&lt;br /&gt;
A language pack maintainer for a Moodle language pack takes responsibility for that language pack. It means contributing to the translation, reviewing contributions of other contributors and approving, improving or rejecting them within a reasonable time frame. The language pack maintainer must pay special attention to the consistency of all Moodle and other terminology all over the language pack. He/She must also pay special attention to the technical correctness of what goes in the language pack since problematic strings can ultimately cause a site in that language to break.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The language pack maintainer should regularly check for outdated strings. Outdated strings are strings that have a modified translation that should be reviewed. The language pack maintainer is the only person who can perform this task. Select all components, tick the &amp;quot;outdated strings only&amp;quot; box and hit &amp;quot;Show strings&amp;quot;. Now review all listed strings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The aim of a language pack maintainer is to get the language pack complete for a standard Moodle installation. &lt;br /&gt;
== Steps for the maintainer, making own contributions==&lt;br /&gt;
# Use AMOS translator interface to translate missing strings or amend the current translation&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the Stage page&lt;br /&gt;
# Make a meaningful comment about your work in the &#039;Commit message&#039; form&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &#039;Commit&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
== Approving contributions from others==&lt;br /&gt;
AMOS allows community members to help with the translation of Moodle strings. &lt;br /&gt;
[[image:amos4.png|300px|thumb|right|Contribution details page]]&lt;br /&gt;
# When a user submits a new contribution, you will receive an automatically generated email from AMOS containing a link to the contribution.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press &#039;Start review&#039; button. That will assign the contribution to yourself, change the status from &#039;New&#039; to &#039;In review&#039;, send an automatically generated email to the contributor and will copy the submitted strings into your stage. You should check that your stage is empty before you apply the submitted strings unless you want to merge several contributions into one commit.&lt;br /&gt;
# Review the submitted strings, eventually edit them. Commit the stage. It is nice to mention the contributor&#039;s name in the commit message and attribute the original authorship to them.&lt;br /&gt;
# Go back to the contribution record and change the status to Accepted or Rejected. An automatically generated email will be sent to the contributor whenever you change the status.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use contribution record comments for further communication with the contributor about the submitted translation.&lt;br /&gt;
# Accepted and Rejected contributions are not shown at the contributions page unless you click the &#039;Show resolved contributions&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
# You will get a weekly reminder of contributed strings that are not processed yet.&lt;br /&gt;
==Translating strings offline==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the [[:en:Language customization|Language customisation]] tool in your local Moodle server to enhance the translation of language strings for the Moodle core files.&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to translate the strings of a particular plugin, you must have that plugin installed on your server first.&lt;br /&gt;
Your translated files will be located inside the local language folder in your Moodle server.&lt;br /&gt;
You can upload these files to AMOS, one file at a time, or zip many files and upload the zip file (which will be un-zipped automatically inside AMOS).&lt;br /&gt;
==Uploading a file of translations==&lt;br /&gt;
To avoid making changes one by one, you can do your translations offline (as above) and upload them to AMOS.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;Stage&#039; in the Navigation block.&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose &#039;Import translated strings from file&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Dag and drop the file.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Import&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
*Note: You can import several files at once if you zip them first and upload the zip file. The zip file is not allowed to contain any folders, only files.&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[AMOS manual]] for further information about the AMOS translation toolkit&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:en:Language packs|Language packs]] user documentation&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Moodle_XML_format&amp;diff=148071</id>
		<title>Moodle XML format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Moodle_XML_format&amp;diff=148071"/>
		<updated>2024-03-20T15:51:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: /* See also */ redirects to the same page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Export questions}}&lt;br /&gt;
The XML Format is a Moodle-specific format for importing and exporting questions to be used with the [[Quiz module]]. The format has been developed within the Moodle Community but other software may support it to a greater or lesser degree.&lt;br /&gt;
==A word about validity (and CDATA)==&lt;br /&gt;
The XML parser assumes that the XML file is well formed and does not detect or report errors. If it is not you are very likely to get unexpected errors. If you are hand-coding the XML file it is strongly recommended that you pass it through some sort of XML verifier before importing into Moodle. A simple way to do this is to open the XML file using Firefox or Internet Explorer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note particularly that embedded HTML fragments should be within [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CDATA CDATA sections]. CDATA example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;questiontext format=&amp;quot;html&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
       &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;![CDATA[&lt;br /&gt;
              Now I can include &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; HTML that I&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
              wish. Without the CDATA, the &amp;lt;i&amp;gt;HTML&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt; tags would break&lt;br /&gt;
              the XML!!&lt;br /&gt;
              ]]&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/questiontext&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Overall structure of XML file==&lt;br /&gt;
The file is enclosed by tags as follows. It is &#039;&#039;&#039;important&#039;&#039;&#039; to make sure the xml tag only is really the first line of the file. A blank first line, or additional tags on the first line will confuse the Moodle XML parser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;?xml version=&amp;quot;1.0&amp;quot; ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;quiz&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 .&lt;br /&gt;
 .&lt;br /&gt;
 .&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/quiz&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the &amp;lt;quiz&amp;gt; tags are any number of &amp;lt;question&amp;gt; tags. One of these &amp;lt;question&amp;gt; tags can be a dummy question with a &#039;&#039;category&#039;&#039; type to specify a category for the import/export. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;category&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;category&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;$course$/XXXX&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/category&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/question&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where XXXX is the new category name. If the category exists, the question(s) will be added to the existing course; otherwise a new category will be created. This only works if you have &amp;quot;Get category from file&amp;quot; checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple categories can be specified in the same file. Just add another dummy &#039;category&#039; question each time you would like to establish a new category and the questions that follow it will be placed there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The file must be encoded in [[UTF8]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle XML import and export are balanced in functionality, so if you need to understand the format you can simply create some questions and export them to see what it looks like.&lt;br /&gt;
==Tags common to all question types==&lt;br /&gt;
A question is written as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;multichoice|truefalse|shortanswer|matching|cloze|essay|numerical|description&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;name&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Name of question&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;/name&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;questiontext format=&amp;quot;html&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;What is the answer to this question?&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;/questiontext&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     .&lt;br /&gt;
     .&lt;br /&gt;
     .&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/question&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each question requires a &amp;lt;name&amp;gt; tag and &amp;lt;question-text&amp;gt; tag for the XML file to import into Moodle properly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Format&amp;quot; selects the [[Formatting options]] for the question text. The options are &#039;&#039;&#039;html&#039;&#039;&#039; (the default), &#039;&#039;&#039;moodle_auto_format&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;plain_text&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;markdown&#039;&#039;&#039;. The choice effects the way in which the text will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further tags, which usually include at least one &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt; tag, follow in the space marked with dots as child nodes to the &amp;lt;question&amp;gt; tag. The response-related tags are listed further down on this page. Various (optional?) tags are possible. &lt;br /&gt;
* tags (non-hierarchical keywords)&lt;br /&gt;
* penalty&lt;br /&gt;
* generalfeedback&lt;br /&gt;
* defaultgrade&lt;br /&gt;
* hidden&lt;br /&gt;
Even though question tags (non-hierarchical keywords) are not fully supported in the question engine, they can be imported and exported via XML. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;question ...&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  ...&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;tags&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tag&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;keyword1&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tag&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tag&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;keyword2&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tag&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    ...&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;/tags&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  ...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/question&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;image&amp;gt; tag contains the url of any included image. Nested within the &amp;lt;image&amp;gt; tag may be an &amp;lt;image_base64&amp;gt; tag which contains the actual image data encoded in base64 [http://www.php.net/manual/en/function.base64-encode.php].&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|If you export questions from a Moodle 1.9 server, the exported file might contain only the relative URL to the image hosted in the 1.9 server, while exported questions from Moodle 2.x and 3.x servers might contain the actual image encoded in base 64. This explains why some question bank import-export operations include all the images and some others don&#039;t.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;In the following question type examples the common parts of the question are not shown to improve clarity. It&#039;s a good idea to export some examples yourself to see a full example.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
==Multiple choice==&lt;br /&gt;
MC questions have one &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt; tag for each choice. Each choice can carry feedback and score weighting (by using the fraction attribute). In addition, an MC question has the following tags:&lt;br /&gt;
* single &#039;&#039;(values: true/false)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* shuffleanswers &#039;&#039;(values: 1/0)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* correctfeedback &lt;br /&gt;
* partiallycorrectfeedback &lt;br /&gt;
* incorrectfeedback&lt;br /&gt;
* answernumbering (allowed values: &#039;none&#039;, &#039;abc&#039;, &#039;ABCD&#039; or &#039;123&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;single&amp;gt; tag is used to distinguish single response (radio button) and multiple response (checkbox) variants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;multichoice&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;The correct answer&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Correct!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;A distractor&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Ooops!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Another distractor&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Ooops!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;shuffleanswers&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/shuffleanswers&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;single&amp;gt;true&amp;lt;/single&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answernumbering&amp;gt;abc&amp;lt;/answernumbering&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/question&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== True/false ==&lt;br /&gt;
Two answer tags are given, one which is true, and one which is false. The fraction attribute of the answer tag identifies which option is correct (100) and which is false (0). Feedback is supported. The following example shows the format when true is the correct answer and false is wrong.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;truefalse&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;true&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Correct!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;false&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Ooops!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/question&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Short answer  ==&lt;br /&gt;
The short answer question type supports alternative correct responses, each with its own weighting and feedback. The Moodle XML format uses one &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt; tag for each of the alternative correct answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;usecase&amp;gt; tag toggles case-sensitivity with the values 1/0. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;shortanswer&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;The correct answer&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Correct!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;shortanswer&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;The correct answer&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Correct!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;An alternative answer&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Correct!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/question&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Numerical response ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following is a simplified version of the Moodle XML format for numerical responses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;numerical&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;23&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Feedback&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/question&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle also supports a &amp;lt;tolerance&amp;gt; tag (how accurate must the number be?) and one or more &amp;lt;unit&amp;gt; tags. Unit tags have names and multipliers. E.g. if the main answer is in kilometres, an additional answer could be the equivalent in metres with a multiplier of 1000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; prior to 1.7.2 the fraction was expressed as a value between 0 and 1 in a &amp;lt;fraction&amp;gt; element and the answer value was &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; enclosed in &amp;lt;text&amp;gt; tags. This format of the numerical question type is deprecated but will still be correctly imported if found (for now).&lt;br /&gt;
== Matching ==&lt;br /&gt;
Pair matching responses use the &amp;lt;shuffleanswers&amp;gt; tag to determine whether the order of the items should be randomized.&lt;br /&gt;
Each pair is contained inside a &amp;lt;subquestion&amp;gt; tag. The first item of each pair is contained with a &amp;lt;text&amp;gt; tag, while the second has an &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt; tag around it as well. Feedback and score weighting is not supported by Moodle for this response type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;matching&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;subquestion&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;This is the 1st item in the 1st pair.&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;This is the 2nd item in the 1st pair.&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/subquestion&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;subquestion&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;This is the 1st item in the 2nd pair.&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;This is the 2nd item in the 2nd pair.&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/subquestion&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;shuffleanswers&amp;gt;true&amp;lt;/shuffleanswers&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/question&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Essay ==&lt;br /&gt;
An example of the essay type question...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;essay&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;/question&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There isn&#039;t an answer and there isn&#039;t a grade in this case. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; prior to 1.7.2 the fraction was expressed as a value between 0 and 1 in a &amp;lt;fraction&amp;gt; element and the answer value was &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; enclosed in &amp;lt;text&amp;gt; tags. This format of the essay question type is deprecated but will still be correctly imported if found (for now).&lt;br /&gt;
== Other question types ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cloze ===&lt;br /&gt;
It is supported, and depends on a special format for the &amp;lt;questiontext&amp;gt; tag.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Description response type===&lt;br /&gt;
This response type has no further tags other than those contained in the question header (such as &amp;lt;questiontext&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
=== Random matching ===&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle has a question type which consists of taking short answer questions in the same quiz and displaying them as a pair matching exercise. However Moodle is neither able to export nor import this question type.&lt;br /&gt;
==Text formats==&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle XML files should explicitly specify the text format (&#039;&#039;&#039;html&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;moodle_auto_format&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;plain_text&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;markdown&#039;&#039;&#039; - these correspond to the constants, FORMAT_HTML, FORMAT_MOODLE, etc. used in the Moodle code) for each piece of content. Note that, by default, the format should be specified on the parent of the &amp;lt;text&amp;gt; element. This is slightly odd, but a remnant of history.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the format is not specified for the questiontext, then &#039;&#039;&#039;html&#039;&#039;&#039; is the default. If the format is not specified on any other part of the question, then the format of the questiontext is the default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(This default changed around November 2011. Before that, the default was &#039;&#039;&#039;moodle_auto_format&#039;&#039;&#039; whenever the format was not specified.)&lt;br /&gt;
==Useful utilities==&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://moodle.org/plugins/qformat_crossxml Cross XML format] This input format plugin is a handy utility that converts question from one question type to another.&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://vletools.com Online Moodle XML converter] Convert from existing text files glossaries and quizzes to Moodle XML format. Also can convert from Moodle XMl to text. &lt;br /&gt;
*[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=398452 R script for converting spreadsheet quiz questions into Moodle XML] - This is an R script to turn a spreadsheet with quiz questions into a Moodle XML file. I included an example spreadsheet. I wrote up a quick start guide, but I can only upload two files. Feel free to modify for personal use. If you make useful modifications, please share them with me. I have only written support for multichoice (single correct answer), shortanswer, or truefalse question types. I have only tested this with Moodle 3.7&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.R-exams.org/ R/exams] is a one-for-all exams generator that can export Moodle XML (among various other output formats) from potentially dynamic exercises written in R/Markdown or R/LaTeX. A brief tutorial for Moodle is available at: [http://www.R-exams.org/tutorials/elearning/ E-Learning Quizzes with R/exams for Moodle and OpenOLAT].&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://digitaliser.getmarked.ai/ getmarked] is a quiz export tool that can be used to move quizzes from Google Forms to Moodle. According to [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=436849#p1758035If this post] &amp;quot;To move your Google Form quiz into Moodle, give getmarked permission to access your forms through OAuth, then you export it as a Moodle XML. If you want to move your Moodle question bank to Google Form, simply do the reverse by exporting your Moodle questions as Moodle XML, upload to getmarked and they can generate a Google Form from it.In addition, they can also import and export to QTI, Zoom, kahoot , quizizz and many other platforms too, it&#039;s really amazing!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Aiken format]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Import and export FAQ]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[User:Frank Ralf/Moodle XML1]] (work in progress)&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://docs.moodle.org/ja/Moodle XMLフォーマット]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://docs.moodle.org/de/ Moodle XML-Format]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://docs.moodle.org/fr/Format XML Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://docs.moodle.org/es/Formato Moodle XML]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Translation_langconfig&amp;diff=147266</id>
		<title>Translation langconfig</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Translation_langconfig&amp;diff=147266"/>
		<updated>2023-11-02T18:01:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: /* localecldr,core_lanconfig */ adding a practical test for determing the correct cldr&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Translation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Langconfig is an important file in a language pack, dealing with all the configuration parameters of that language. It is good practice to review this first when starting of a new language pack or when taking on responsibility of an existing language pack. You can edit it by going to lang.moodle.org and find it as the core_langconfig component for your language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you find a little documentation for each setting to help you deciding what should go there for your language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===alphabet,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The alphabet in your language. Used e.g. for the list of letters on the participants page.&lt;br /&gt;
===am,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The way to indicate morning in your language. This is used on servers that only support 24 hour time for your language. (see https://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-74379).&lt;br /&gt;
===amcaps,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The way to indicate morning in capitals.&lt;br /&gt;
===backupnameformat,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
===decsep,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How decimals are separated in your language. [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Decimal_separator Usually a dot or a comma]. Take note that some countries which seem to share the same language may have a different character to separate the integer part from the fractional part of a number written in decimal form. e.g. Central American Spanish-speaking countries use the decimal point, while South American Spanish-speaking countries use the decimal comma. More info on the [[Decimal separator]] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example:&lt;br /&gt;
 * English: 36.5&lt;br /&gt;
 * Dutch: 36,5&lt;br /&gt;
===firstdayofweek,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The first day of the week in your language. Allowed values are 0,1,2,3,4,5,6, where 0 stands for Sunday.&lt;br /&gt;
===iso6391,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The ISO 639.1 value for your language. You can find this value easily on [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_ISO_639-1_codes Wikipedia].&lt;br /&gt;
===iso6392,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The ISO 639.2 value for your language. You can find this value easily on [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_ISO_639-2_codes Wikipedia].&lt;br /&gt;
===labelsep,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How a label is separated from a form. Could be a colon, a space and a colon or something different, according to what&#039;s generally used in your language. This character is not read by screen readers for accessibility reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
===listsep,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The symbol usually used in your language, for separating items in a list. This is used e.g. when using formulas with multiple items in the gradebook. This must be a symbol different from the decsep symbol.&lt;br /&gt;
===locale,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
locale for *nix servers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your Moodle calendar is not translated, then this string is wrong (or your server is not configured to support the language)&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Locales, used in language packs should come only from the table of locales at [[Table_of_locales]] and the list at [[List_of_locales_supported_on_Moodle_community_servers]]}}&lt;br /&gt;
An unsupported locale in a Mac or Linux site will produce the following error when you try to update your language pack:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Unsupported locale mac.png|400px|link=Special:FilePath/Unsupported_locale_mac.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And, more important, it may produce an intermitent &#039;undefined&#039; error message:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ERROR undefined.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
===localecldr,core_lanconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
See http://cldr.unicode.org/index/cldr-spec/picking-the-right-language-code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A practical test can be found on https://util.unicode.org/UnicodeJsps/languageid.jsp&lt;br /&gt;
===localewin,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
locale for Windows servers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your Moodle calendar is not translated, then this string is wrong (or your server is not configured to support the language). There are quite a few languages that are not supported by Windows servers and the localewin server can not be set. In that case, you have to run your Moodle on a *nix server to make the translation of your Moodle calendar work&lt;br /&gt;
===localewincharset,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The character set to use when Moodle is installed on a Windows server&lt;br /&gt;
===oldcharset,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
Necessary to upgrade from prior to 1.6. This string defines the charset used in 1.5 and earlier for this language pack. For language packs that start later then Moodle 1.5, this can be left empty&lt;br /&gt;
===parentlanguage,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The original Moodle default Australian language pack has this field empty (as the Australian English language IS the official Moodle language).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your language pack relies on another one (it is a &#039;child&#039; language of a &#039;parent&#039; language), then this is the place to point out which language pack. &#039;&#039;&#039;For most language packs, this should be left empty&#039;&#039;&#039;, to default to English if strings are missing. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: Canadian French (fr_ca) is mostly the same as French (fr) apart from a few changes. Creating a language pack with as parent language French will shop French if a string does not exist in the language pack Canadian French. If a string doesn&#039;t exist in both language packs, English is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the download page for the language packs (https://download.moodle.org/langpack/3.7/) you can see how many strings are different from the parent language pack. In Moodle 3.7, Canadian French had 998 changes from French.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Using language customization for parentlanguage inside langconfig.php in an existing Moodle server, where you add a parent language (while the AMOS parentlanguage string is actually empty) will ask for the installation of said parent language in the server, but will not substitute the missing translations in the child language with those of the parent language; English will be shown. Surgically editing (a dangerous, never recommended procedure) the langconfig.php file of the server would work, until the next language pack update -manual or cron made-  erases the change.}}&lt;br /&gt;
===pm,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The way to indicate afternoon in your language. This is used on servers that only support 24 hour time for your language. (see https://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-74379).&lt;br /&gt;
===pmcaps,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The way to indicate afternoon in capitals.&lt;br /&gt;
===questioniconfollowlangdirection===&lt;br /&gt;
*The setting to specify whether the question icon follows the language direction (or not.) &lt;br /&gt;
*Set it to &#039;yes&#039; for RTL languages such as Arabic where the question mark is flipped.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set it to &#039;no&#039; for Hebrew where the question mark is not flipped.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Since this is a setting, as with all settings, it must be in English, either &#039;yes&#039; or &#039;no&#039;, even in languages other than English.&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedate,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedatefullshort,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedateshort,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedatetime,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedatetimeshort,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedaydate,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedaydatetime,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedayshort,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and day are displayed in short in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedaytime,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and day are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimemonthyear,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How month and year are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimerecent,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimerecentfull,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed for recent activities in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimetime,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time is displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===thisdirection,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
In which direction your language should be displayed on the screen. The only possible options are ltr (left to right) or rtl (right to left).&#039;&#039;&#039;Do not attempt to translate these&#039;&#039;&#039;, or [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=328567#p1323101 you will wreak havoc on many themes].&lt;br /&gt;
===thisdirectionvertical,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How text that is printed vertical on the screen is oriënted (like in a docked block).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only possible values can be btt (bottom to top) or ttb (top to bottom). &#039;&#039;&#039;Do not attempt to translate these&#039;&#039;&#039;, or [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=328567#p1323101 you will wreak havoc on many themes].&lt;br /&gt;
===thislanguage,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The name of your language in your own language&lt;br /&gt;
===thislanguageint,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The name of your language in English&lt;br /&gt;
===thousandssep,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How you separate thousands in your language.&lt;br /&gt;
Important: this can not be a space (more information in discussion http://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=1450#p1730). If you want a space, you can try with &amp;amp;amp;nbsp; but that is not fully tested yet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
 * in Dutch 1.000.000 (with a dot)&lt;br /&gt;
 * in English 1,000,000 (with a comma)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://docs.moodle.org/es/Langconfig]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Plagiarism_Prevention_Using_Compilatio&amp;diff=146620</id>
		<title>Plagiarism Prevention Using Compilatio</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Plagiarism_Prevention_Using_Compilatio&amp;diff=146620"/>
		<updated>2023-08-29T10:25:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: /* Creating a Moodle Activity */ do not refer to specific documentation version&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Plagiarism prevention}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Compilatio Plagiarism Plugin for Moodle 2 currently supports the old Assignment module in Moodle 2.0/2.1/2.2 and the new assignment module in Moodle 2.3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a Moodle Activity==&lt;br /&gt;
#Turn editing on inside your course: https://docs.moodle.org/en/Turn_editing_on&lt;br /&gt;
#in the drop lists provided select the activity module you wish to add(in Moodle 2.3 Compilatio only currently works with the assignment types)&lt;br /&gt;
# Configure Compilatio settings for this activity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CompilatioAssignmentSettings.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Viewing the Compilatio generated reports==&lt;br /&gt;
After a student has uploaded a file to Moodle, the file is passed to Compilatio behind the scenes and&lt;br /&gt;
it can take some time before a report is available.&lt;br /&gt;
# click on the link to view submitted assignments [[File:ViewSubmittedAssignments.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
# on the submissions page all the students are listed – beside each file is the response from Compilatio&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CompilatioSubmissions.png]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=error/moodle/filereferenceproblem&amp;diff=146619</id>
		<title>error/moodle/filereferenceproblem</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=error/moodle/filereferenceproblem&amp;diff=146619"/>
		<updated>2023-08-29T09:07:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: Created page with &amp;quot;Possible use of a filename containing ; or }  See https://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-79017 for workaround&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Possible use of a filename containing ; or }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See https://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-79017 for workaround&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=error/moodle/dmlwriteexception&amp;diff=146551</id>
		<title>error/moodle/dmlwriteexception</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=error/moodle/dmlwriteexception&amp;diff=146551"/>
		<updated>2023-08-23T12:21:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: /* MySQL */another cause for this: max_binlog_cache_size&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This indicates that a general error occurred when Moodle tried to write to the database. If you turn on [[Debugging]] you will get more detailed information about what the problem is.&lt;br /&gt;
==dmlwriteexception error when trying to save page that has content in texteditor==&lt;br /&gt;
The most common reason for Moodle users to having this error is when copy-pasting materials from outern source e.g. MS Word or webpages. If the source material contains formattings the source code may not entirely get copied and when pasting the material the source code has open tags or other formatting. The result is broken code that leads to dmlwriteexception. You can paste the material with paste special option or clear formatting (or simply just copy-paste the text to text-editor and then copy-paste the text to Moodle).&lt;br /&gt;
==MySQL==&lt;br /&gt;
If you&#039;re using a MySQL database for your Moodle installation, this error can be caused by the server&#039;s &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;max_allowed_packet&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; size being configured incorrectly. [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=230681#p1001751 Increasing this value may resolve the issue.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another reason on MySQL can be that the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;max_binlog_cache_size&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is too small. [https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.0/en/replication-options-binary-log.html#sysvar_max_binlog_cache_size This can be increased up to 4GB max on MySQL 8].&lt;br /&gt;
==dmlwriteexception error when restoring a course==&lt;br /&gt;
If you obtain a dmlwriteexception error when restoring a course, it is recommended that InnoDB tables are converted to the Barracuda file format. See the section &#039;Converting InnoDB tables to Barracuda&#039; in [[Administration via command line]] for details of why this is recommended plus information on a tool for converting tables.&lt;br /&gt;
==dmlwriteexeption error when importing quiz questions==&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure the uploaded file is UTF-8 without BOM&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Development:DML exceptions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Error|Dmlwriteexception]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:error/moodle/dmlwriteexception]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:error/moodle/dmlwriteexception]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Talk:Translation_langconfig&amp;diff=146535</id>
		<title>Talk:Translation langconfig</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Talk:Translation_langconfig&amp;diff=146535"/>
		<updated>2023-08-23T06:24:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Question:&lt;br /&gt;
In questioniconfollowlangdirection&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The setting to specify whether the question icon follows the language direction (or not.) &lt;br /&gt;
*Set it to &#039;yes&#039; for RTL languages such as Arabic where the question mark is flipped.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In non-English languages the &#039;yes&#039; should be the English string &#039;yes&#039; or the translated string for &#039;yes&#039; ? [[User:German Valero|German Valero]] ([[User talk:German Valero|talk]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since it is a setting, it should remain in English. --[[User:koen roggemans|koen roggemans]] ([[User talk:koen roggemans|talk]]) 06:24, 23 August 2023 (UTC)&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Quiz_FAQ&amp;diff=145717</id>
		<title>Quiz FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Quiz_FAQ&amp;diff=145717"/>
		<updated>2023-03-20T13:58:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: /* Can I edit questions after a quiz is started or submitted */ Procedure for Moodle 4+&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Quiz}}&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
===How can guests answer a Moodle quiz?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is not possible for guests to use [[Activities|activities]] in Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But you can  build a quiz on Google Forms and give a link from within Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I try a quiz before it is released?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have prepared a quiz exam for your students. It is currently in a hidden state. The exam opens on the day of the exam, at a time that the students know about. However, to satisfy yourself that it is doable in the time allotted, You wish to do a dry run yourself before that date. How can You accomplish this?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Method 1: Use the Preview feature available to you as a teacher as you are making the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Method 2: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Make a dummy account with a name like &amp;quot;Test Student&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enrol that user in the course as a student.&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a &amp;quot;User override&amp;quot; to the quiz, so &amp;quot;Test Student&amp;quot; can attempt the quiz before it is open to everyone else.&lt;br /&gt;
# Log in as &amp;quot;Test student&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Attempt the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
# Log back in as teacher.&lt;br /&gt;
# Review the attempt.&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to Results -&amp;gt; Grades and delete the test attempt.&lt;br /&gt;
# Un-enrol &amp;quot;Test Student&amp;quot; from your course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Method 3: Set up a Moodle Playground course for your teachers. Add teachers with dual role (teacher and student). Teachers can later copy the quiz/assignment/whatever over to their live class.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I enable notification of quiz submissions?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Quiz submission notification]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I send a bulk message to all students who haven&#039;t completed a quiz?===&lt;br /&gt;
*From your navigation block, click &#039;&#039;Reports&amp;gt;Course participation&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*From the drop down, choose your quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
*In &#039;&#039;Show only&#039;&#039;, choose &amp;quot;Student&amp;quot; and in &#039;&#039;Actions&#039;&#039;, choose &amp;quot;post&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*In the list that appears, tick/check the boxes next to those you wish to message.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the bottom dropdown &#039;&#039;With selected users&#039;&#039;, choose &amp;quot;send message&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:quizemail.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can build a quiz that picks X questions randomly from a larger question bank?===&lt;br /&gt;
See the section on adding random questions in [[Building Quiz]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I print a copy of a quiz?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use your browser printer option (for example by right-clicking and selecting Print) When a student prints their finished quiz, responses and feedback will also be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:browserquizprint29.png|thumb|center|400px|Print preview of finished quiz - Click to enlarge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also export the question as Moodle XML, or GIFT format. If you open either of those files in a text-editor, you should be able to see most of the details of each question. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How can I print all the students&#039; quiz questions and answers?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Two options are available:&lt;br /&gt;
** Install the [https://moodle.org/plugins/quiz_archive quiz archive report] additional plugin  - Moodle quiz report plugin to achieve archiving your test, by printing out all attempts at once.&lt;br /&gt;
** Install the [https://moodle.org/plugins/quiz_answersheets Export quiz attempts] additional plugin - This quiz report allows you to get view of a quiz attempt that is formatted for easy printing. &lt;br /&gt;
=== How can I optimize a Moodle server for performing more concurrent quizzes? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Performance recommendations]], also the forum discussion [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=418615 Quiz with 400+ concurrent users: what‘s best?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Can I release the answers to students who did not attempt a quiz? ===&lt;br /&gt;
Yes. One way to handle this with standard Moodle would be to open the quiz after the deadline and add a time limit to the quiz of one second. Unless students are extremely quick they will not be able to gain any points, but would see the general feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How can I make Moodle quizzes if my school does not have enough computers / fast internet / a good Moodle server? ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Check the [[Offline quiz activity]] additional plugin.&lt;br /&gt;
* Check the [https://moodle.org/plugins/mod_exam exam] additional plugin. It allows the teacher to build quizzes with multiple choice question based on Quiz module. Main purpose of Exam module is to improve performance of quiz and to reduce database overhead, so that a large number of users can attempt quiz simultaneously. Warning  - Technically it is possible for students to manipulate their exam grades if they know right parameters or they could see correct answers if they could read javascript objets being transmitted in their browser. Use with Caution.&lt;br /&gt;
* Read about the use of Chromebooks and iPad in the [[https://docs.moodle.org/38/en/Safe_Exam_Browser | Safe Exam Browser]] Moodle documentation for version until 3.8.&lt;br /&gt;
* Visit the page for [https://www.eventbrite.com.au/o/transforming-exams-e-exams-symposium-17431618115 Transforming Exams] - Transforming Exams is an Australian Government funded research project looking at approaches to conducting authentic digital assessment in the exam rooms of Australian universities via the use of Bring-your-own laptops. The project involves 10 Australian university partners and is lead out of Monash University. See [http://transformingexams.com/ TransformingExams.com] for project information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Can I print the quiz results without the answers history?===&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to print the results of all the student attempts, but omit the answers history, as it might take much space, you can do so by accessing the settings on Site admin -&amp;gt; Appearance -&amp;gt; Additional HTML. In the &#039;Within head&#039; setting, put something like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;style type=&amp;quot;text/css&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 @media print {&lt;br /&gt;
     .que .history {&lt;br /&gt;
         display: none;&lt;br /&gt;
     }&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/style&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Is it possible for a teacher to add a personal/private note to a student&#039;s quiz submission?===&lt;br /&gt;
Not really, but as a workaround, you can use the buit-in [[Notes]] feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Copying a quiz===&lt;br /&gt;
When you add questions to a quiz, you are not actually adding questions, but rather links or pointers to questions in the question bank. When you copy a quiz, two things can happen depending on where the questions are placed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If the questions are placed in a question category of the quiz, for example the &amp;quot;Default category for questions shared in the quiz context&amp;quot;, the quiz is copied as well as the question category together with the questions it contains. See [[https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/Question_contexts#How_to_access_the_Quiz_activity_context How to access the Quiz activity context]].&lt;br /&gt;
* If the questions are not placed in a question category of the quiz, the quiz is copied but not the questions. However, the links to the original questions are copied. Therefore, when editing the quiz copy, you are also editing the questions of the original quiz, because the question links point to the same questions. Be careful!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Can I know the marks per each section of a quiz?===&lt;br /&gt;
An additional plugin [https://moodle.org/plugins/quiz_markspersection Marks per section] does exactly that.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setup==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why am I no longer allowed to add or remove questions?===&lt;br /&gt;
Most likely it is because you have students that have already attempted the quiz. You will need to delete all of the attempts by selecting them and choosing to delete them if you need to add/remove questions from a quiz. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are developing a new quiz where the attempts have just been trials then deleting the previous attempts will have no consequences in the grade book. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several ways of getting to the “attempts #” which you need to click on to delete the previous attempts. Use which ever works for you.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the quiz that you want to amend. It will take you to a page with “attempts #&amp;quot; at the top.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you are on a page with this message “You cannot add or remove questions because the quiz has been attempted (attempts #)” Click on &amp;quot;attempts #&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you have navigated away from the page with the message go to the Settings block &amp;gt; Quiz Administration &amp;gt; Edit Quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
Whichever way you find “attempts #” click on it and you will go to a page with a drop down menu at the top. Select “all users who have attempted the quiz”. There are several other click boxes select whatever applies to your situation.&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Show Report” and then “select all”. Click “Delete selected attempts” and confirm selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go back to  Quiz Administration &amp;gt; Edit Quiz and you will now be able to add or delete questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I remove a problem question after the quiz has been taken?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can not remove a question once a quiz has been taken by one student or more. However you can change the score and flag the question so you know it has problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the score for that question to 0. &lt;br /&gt;
*Caution: In some versions of Moodle if you use this question in an other quiz, this will potentially change the question in that quiz as well. A trick is to score the question as 0, then regrade the just completed quiz. This will establish the new grade for gradebook.  Now go back and change the score to the original value.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Find the question in Question Bank.  Maybe edit the title (e.g. &#039;Do not use in Bio101&#039;).  Or if you do not share the question category with other teachers, create a sub category, move the offending question there, and perhaps create a better question to replace the one you just moved.  Create a new quiz and if necessary hide the old one.&lt;br /&gt;
*Caution: if other departments or teachers use a question category it might be wise to check with the team before moving or changing any question.   This is one reason importing questions in a course is a good best practice in some situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I turn off glossary auto-linking in a quiz? ===&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Quiz administration settings block there will be a link &amp;quot;filter&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the link and you will have the option to disable filters just for that particular quiz:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Can I make a second quiz start right away after a first quiz is finished?===&lt;br /&gt;
By using a hack (See [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=377382 this forum thread]). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;Overall feedback&#039; for the first quiz, add some code which redirects to the second quiz. Make a big button to make that obvious:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align:center;padding:20px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;https://--your domain--/mod/quiz/view.php?id=--quiz 2 no--&amp;quot; target=&amp;quot;_blank&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;button type=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height:100px;font-size:24px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Click here to access Quiz 2&amp;lt;/button&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It would look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Click here to access Quiz 2.png|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The button will not appear in the gradebook.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the quiz settings and under Review options, select &#039;Overall feedback&#039; under &#039;Immediately after the attempt&#039;. Deselect &#039;Overall feedback&#039; under &#039;Later, while the quiz is still open&#039; and &#039;After the quiz is closed&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Prevent entry to a quiz some time after its start===&lt;br /&gt;
Suppose a quiz is set to open at 13:00 and the time limit is set to 45 minutes or some other value. Students have to enter the quiz from 13:00 to 13:15, otherwise they should not be able to do so. Proceed as follows to prevent students from entering the quiz after 13:15.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create another quiz, let&#039;s call it an &#039;entry&#039; quiz, containing a simple multiple choice, true or false, or short answer question, such as &amp;quot;Do you want to take the quiz? Y or N&amp;quot; or any other similar question. Tell students that they must answer and &amp;quot;Submit all and finish&amp;quot; in order to access the main quiz. In the settings of this entry quiz, set &amp;quot;Open the quiz&amp;quot; to 13:00 and &amp;quot;Close the quiz&amp;quot; to 13:15, that is, it is only open for the first 15 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the main quiz settings and under &amp;quot;Restrict access&amp;quot;, add a &amp;quot;Grade&amp;quot; restriction and select the entry quiz. If you do not specify a grade, the restriction is satisfied regardless of the grade obtained in the entry quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also add &amp;quot;Date&amp;quot; restrictions to both the entry quiz and the main quiz to control their display.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, punctual students will have access to the entry quiz from 13:00 to 13:15 and therefore to the main quiz throughout its 45 minutes duration. Latecomers will not have access to the entry quiz after 13:15 and therefore they will not be able to access the main quiz at all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Attempts==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I give particular students extra time or numbers of attempts?===&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Quiz administration there is a link &amp;quot;User overrides&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click this link and you will be able to choose one or more users and change quiz dates, times or number of attempts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:quizuseroverride.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Can I have different start times/timings/numbers of attempts for different groups?===&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Quiz administration settings block, there is a link &amp;quot;group overrides&amp;quot; that allows you to do things like grant extensions to certain groups of students.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click this link and you will be able to select your groups and change the quiz dates, times and number of attempts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:quizgroupoverride.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What happens if students submit answers after the quiz closing date?===&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible for students to still submit answers after the quiz has closed (for example if they started the attempt before the closing date but then took a long time before submitting). These responses are stored by the quiz module, but the students are not given any credit for them. The teacher can see these answers when reviewing the student&#039;s attempts and can give the student credit for them by manually entering a grade in the gradebook. Also the teacher could change the closing date after the fact and regrade the attempts. The students&#039; answers would then get graded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can a &amp;quot;Never submitted quiz&amp;quot; attempt be submitted?===&lt;br /&gt;
Currently  there is no way to retrieve an attempt that was &amp;quot;Never Submitted&amp;quot;, and get it back into the &amp;quot;In progress&amp;quot; state. Perhaps the best solution is to plan ahead and set your quiz to set your quiz to be submitted automatically.  Alternatively, you can&lt;br /&gt;
# Update the quiz : set the &amp;quot;close the quiz&amp;quot; date after today&lt;br /&gt;
# Set &amp;quot;When time expires&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;There is a grace period ...&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Under Grade set &amp;quot;Attempts allowed&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;unlimited&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Question behavior: Each attempt builds on the last &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Invite the students who did not close their exams&lt;br /&gt;
# Allow them to start a new attempt, and close it immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why can&#039;t people (guests) attempt a quiz without creating an account and logging in?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is difficult to implement for technical reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To explain: The quiz has to link all information about an attempt to a particular &#039;user&#039; record in the database, and each user can only have one open quiz attempt at a time. All not-logged-in users share the same &#039;guest&#039; user database record. Therefore, two guests could not attempt the quiz at the same time, and even if they could, it would be difficult to prevent one guest seeing another guest&#039;s attempts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, given enough work, it would be possible to change some of those assumptions, and so make it possible for guests to attempt quizzes. Indeed, some of the obstructions to implementing this have already been removed while doing other work on the quiz, but there is still some way to go. If you would like to see this implemented, please vote for MDL-17892.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A workaround is to create a visitor account, say with username = guest,  password = visitor, for everyone to share.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I prevent a student from reviewing or jumping around questions in a quiz?===&lt;br /&gt;
You can block the quiz navigation block and the summary of quiz page with CSS code in a theme.   However, if a student fails to answer a question, they will not know if you implement this &amp;quot;solution&amp;quot;. Also if others on the site do not want this patch, make sure the theme you select for the course is not used by others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example using the Afterburner theme, enter this in the CSS code area:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:div#mod_quiz_navblock {visibility:hidden;}&lt;br /&gt;
:table.quizsummaryofattempt {visibility:hidden;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are other CSS solutions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I force my students to answer all the question in a quiz before they submit?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are various ways to answer this:&lt;br /&gt;
# You can&#039;t.&lt;br /&gt;
# Your students are not stupid. They know they will get zero marks for any question they do not answer, so they already have a strong incentive to answer every question. Furthermore, at the end of the quiz there is the summary page where they can easily check that they have answered all the questions before they submit, so they won&#039;t accidentally miss questions.&lt;br /&gt;
# OK, so you want us to write code that won&#039;t let students submit before they have answered each question. Well, all that does is forces the student to put random junk like &amp;quot;asdf&amp;quot; into each question before they click the button, or randomly make a choice in each multiple choice question. There is no educational benefit in this. You get more meaningful information if students leave those questions blank rather than putting in random responses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Can I force a user to reattempt only incorrect questions in subsequent attempts?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The easiest way to implement this solution is to use javascript or modify the source code on your Moodle site. The javascript solution described in [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=395125 this forum thread] is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Insert the following code in the HTML of the text of a description question.&lt;br /&gt;
* Include this description question in the quizzes. If the quizzes are displayed on multiple pages, add the description question on each page.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are using the [[Adaptable theme]] you can put the JS in the JS section of the [[Adaptable theme]]. With the standard [[Boost theme]] or [[Classic theme]] place the script in the Site Administration / Appearance / Additional HTML section. This way you don&#039;t have to include the script in every quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Title of the quiz&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;  // optional&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Give some info.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;      // optional&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;script src=&amp;quot;https://ajax.googleapis.com/ajax/libs/jquery/3.4.1/jquery.min.js&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/script&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;script&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    $(document).ready(function() {&lt;br /&gt;
        // Clear sessionStorage after a certain delay        &lt;br /&gt;
        if (sessionStorage.getItem(&amp;quot;setTime&amp;quot;) != &amp;quot;set&amp;quot;) {&lt;br /&gt;
            nd = new Date();&lt;br /&gt;
            lastTime = nd.getTime().toString();&lt;br /&gt;
            sessionStorage.setItem(&amp;quot;time&amp;quot;, lastTime);&lt;br /&gt;
            sessionStorage.setItem(&amp;quot;setTime&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;set&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
        }&lt;br /&gt;
        // Set the delay to say 5 minutes: aferXmin = 5&lt;br /&gt;
        // (Use 0.33 minutes, i.e. 20 sec, for demonstration purposes)&lt;br /&gt;
        afterXmin = 5;&lt;br /&gt;
        maxDelay = afterXmin * 60 * 1000;&lt;br /&gt;
        d = new Date();&lt;br /&gt;
        newTime = d.getTime()&lt;br /&gt;
        lastTime = sessionStorage.getItem(&amp;quot;time&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
        delay = newTime - lastTime;&lt;br /&gt;
        if (delay &amp;gt; maxDelay) {&lt;br /&gt;
            sessionStorage.clear();&lt;br /&gt;
        }&lt;br /&gt;
        // Show or hide correct or incorrect questions in the previous attempt:&lt;br /&gt;
        i = 0;&lt;br /&gt;
        $(&amp;quot;.que&amp;quot;).each(function() {&lt;br /&gt;
            i++;&lt;br /&gt;
            var x = i.toString();&lt;br /&gt;
            if ($(this).hasClass(&amp;quot;correct&amp;quot;)) {&lt;br /&gt;
                sessionStorage.setItem(x, &amp;quot;correct&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
            }&lt;br /&gt;
            if ($(this).hasClass(&amp;quot;incorrect&amp;quot;)) {&lt;br /&gt;
                sessionStorage.setItem(x, &amp;quot;incorrect&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
            }&lt;br /&gt;
            if ($(this).hasClass(&amp;quot;answersaved&amp;quot;) &amp;amp;&amp;amp; sessionStorage.getItem(x) == &amp;quot;correct&amp;quot;) {&lt;br /&gt;
                $(this).hide();&lt;br /&gt;
            }&lt;br /&gt;
            if ($(this).hasClass(&amp;quot;answersaved&amp;quot;) &amp;amp;&amp;amp; sessionStorage.getItem(x) == &amp;quot;incorrect&amp;quot;) {&lt;br /&gt;
                $(this).show();&lt;br /&gt;
            }&lt;br /&gt;
        });&lt;br /&gt;
    });&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/script&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Prevent students from taking the quiz some time after its opening time===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suppose a quiz opens at 14:00 on April 12, 2022. You don&#039;t want students to be able to start it after 14:10. Here is one way to do it. Note that the solution below is a workaround until a custom quiz access rule plugin is developed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create a [[Label|label]] just above the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the label settings and in the &amp;quot;Label text&amp;quot;, insert a message such as &amp;quot;Click the [Mark as done] button below to access the quiz:&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Under &amp;quot;[[Restrict access]]&amp;quot;, add a &amp;quot;Date&amp;quot; restriction &amp;quot;until 12 April 2022 14 10&amp;quot; as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
*Under &amp;quot;[[Activity completion]]&amp;quot;, set &amp;quot;Completion tracking&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;Students can manually mark the activity as completed&amp;quot; as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;border:6px solid #eee;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[{{ns:file}}:MoodleDocs_20210412_1528.png|850px]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In the quiz settings and under &amp;quot;[[Restrict access]]&amp;quot;, set an &amp;quot;[[Activity completion]]&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;Click the [Mark as done] button below to access th...  must be marked complete&amp;quot; as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;border:6px solid #eee;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[{{ns:file}}:MoodleDocs_20210412_1536.png|800px]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Between 14:00 and 14:10, students will see the following.&lt;br /&gt;
*If they do not click the [Mark as done] button, the quiz is not visible nor accessible:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;border:6px solid #eee;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[{{ns:file}}:MoodleDocs_20210412_1554.png|750px]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If they click the [Mark as done] button, the quiz is visible and accessible:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;border:6px solid #eee;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[{{ns:file}}:MoodleDocs_20210412_1556.png|750px]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After 2:10 pm, the &amp;quot;Click the [Mark as done] button below to access th...&amp;quot; label is no longer visible. So for students who have not clicked the [Mark as done] button, the quiz is no longer visible nor accessible. For students who clicked the [Mark as done] button, the quiz is accessible and remains accessible even if they temporarily quit and return to the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could add another [[Label|label]] with the text &amp;quot;It is past 2:10 PM so you missed the opening of the quiz. It is no longer available.&amp;quot;, with &amp;quot;Date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;[[Activity completion]]&amp;quot; restrictions set in such a way that this label is displayed after 2:10 pm and only to students who have not clicked the [Mark as done] button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grades==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why is my quiz not displaying in the gradebook?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the editing quiz page and check that you have a maximum grade that is more than 0 - if your score is 0, then the quiz will not appear in the gradebook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===I&#039;ve entered quiz grades manually in the gradebook. How can I allow students to improve on these grades?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a grade is entered directly in the gradebook, an &amp;quot;overridden&amp;quot; flag is set, meaning that the grade can no longer be changed from within the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, the flag can be removed by turning editing on in the [[Grader report|grader report]], then clicking the edit grade icon, unchecking the overridden box and saving the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I set a grade to pass?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the section &#039;Setting a grade to pass for a quiz&#039; in [[Activity completion settings]] for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I have a quiz that is not graded?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Edit quiz page, change the total score and each question&#039;s score to 0 instead of the defaults of 10 and 1 per question:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:quizscore0.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Can I edit questions after a quiz is started or submitted?===&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of cases when you want to do that: you notice a typo or a missing image in a question while the quiz is running, you notice an error in the grading of a question after students have finished the test.&lt;br /&gt;
In both cases make sure your quiz is set to use the latest version of the problem question, improve and save the question. Then click on the &amp;quot;Regrade all&amp;quot; button in the quiz grading screen. The behaviour in Moodle 4+ quiz is that questions set to use the latest version, will be reloaded in the quiz by pressing the regrade button to use your latest changes. Running and submitted quizzes will now use the new version of the question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Appearance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I turn off question flagging?===&lt;br /&gt;
By default, flags are available in quiz questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:flag.png|119px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a capability attached to this: [[Capabilities/moodle/question:flag]]. Remove this capability from roles that you don&#039;t want to see the flags. You can either do that by editing the role definitions globally, or by overriding the permissions in just one quiz or course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I hide the number of marks available for each question?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is not really possible unless you are prepared to edit the code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a custom theme, you can add CSS like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;css&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
.que .info .grade { display: none; }&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
or you could try to make it more specific, and only hide the grade before the question is answered:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;css&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
.que.answersaved .info .grade,&lt;br /&gt;
.que.invalidanswer .info .grade,&lt;br /&gt;
.que.notyetanswered .info .grade { display: none; }&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can also add this CSS using the [[Header_and_footer|Additional HTML admin setting]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, you can alter the PHP code here: https://github.com/moodle/moodle/blob/4de51c25ae227a727dcba7c39f6f644a5d47ce7a/mod/quiz/locallib.php#L1820. Change that line to give the behaviour you want, e.g.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$options-&amp;gt;marks = self::extract($quiz-&amp;gt;reviewmarks, $when,&lt;br /&gt;
                self::MARK_AND_MAX, self::HIDDEN);&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Be warned that any of these approaches will affect every quiz in the Moodle site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I delay the quiz feedback after the quiz has passed===&lt;br /&gt;
* Suppose the students take a &amp;quot;Main&amp;quot; one-hour quiz from 2 April 14:00 to 2 April 15:00. They shall not have any feedback during and after the quiz until the following week.&lt;br /&gt;
* Students take a &amp;quot;Follow up&amp;quot; quiz a week later, starting 9 April 14:00. If they succeed the &amp;quot;Follow up&amp;quot; quiz, they can then review the &amp;quot;Main&amp;quot; quiz and get their points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can be done by editing the &amp;quot;Main&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Follow up&amp;quot; quiz settings, and the Gradebook set up as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MoodleDocs201904041052.png|280px|thumb|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Main&amp;quot; quiz settings&#039;&#039;&#039;   &#039;&#039;See also the image on the right&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Timing&lt;br /&gt;
  Open the quiz:   2 April 14:00&lt;br /&gt;
  Close the quiz:  9 April 14:00&lt;br /&gt;
Review options&lt;br /&gt;
  During the attempt&lt;br /&gt;
     Uncheck feedbacks&lt;br /&gt;
  Immediately after the attempt&lt;br /&gt;
     Uncheck feedbacks&lt;br /&gt;
  Later, while the quiz is still open&lt;br /&gt;
     Uncheck feedbacks&lt;br /&gt;
  After the quiz is closed&lt;br /&gt;
     Check feedbacks&lt;br /&gt;
Restrict access&lt;br /&gt;
  Student must match any of the following&lt;br /&gt;
     Date: until 2 April 15:00&lt;br /&gt;
     or&lt;br /&gt;
     Student must match all of the following (restriction set)&lt;br /&gt;
        Date: from 9 April 14:00&lt;br /&gt;
        and&lt;br /&gt;
        Grade: Follow up&lt;br /&gt;
          Check must be ≥ 1 %&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Follow up&amp;quot; quiz settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Timing&lt;br /&gt;
  Open the quiz: 9 April 14:00&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Gradebook set up&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
 Main quiz: Weight 0.0, ID number &amp;quot;main&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 Follow up quiz: Weight 0.0, ID number &amp;quot;followup&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 Grade item &amp;quot;Total&amp;quot;: Weight 100.0, Calculation = [​[main]​] + [​[followup]​]  &#039;&#039;(&amp;lt;- do not copy/paste this equation, rewrite it)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Is there a way to display submitted images instead of titles of Images on the review page for the quiz?===&lt;br /&gt;
Yes. See [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=392623#p1582739 this forum post].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Errors==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===I obtain the error &#039;The number of random questions required is more than are still available in the category!&#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Review your quiz and verify Moodle has enough questions from each category of questions it will be pulling from. You may have inadvertently selected more questions than what exists in the category. Also make sure you&#039;re not pulling questions from a category that has zero questions. Because you are picking random questions, rather than a specific question, it may not be apparent at first that you have run out of questions to ask!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===I&#039;m getting the error &#039; There are not enough questions in the category... &#039; when trying to add random questions but I DO definitely have enough questions!===&lt;br /&gt;
Check to see if you have any questions marked as &#039;Draft&#039; rather than &#039;Ready&#039;. They will not be available when you want to add random questions until you set them as &#039;Ready&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quiz plugins==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of ways to extend quizzes, such as adding new reports and questions types. See [https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&amp;amp;id=28 Moodle plugins directory: Plugin type: Quiz].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Effective quiz practices]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Questions FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Any further questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please post in the [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=737 Quiz forum] on moodle.org.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Test FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Examen FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:FAQ sur les tests]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Lesson_FAQ&amp;diff=145496</id>
		<title>Lesson FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Lesson_FAQ&amp;diff=145496"/>
		<updated>2023-02-02T11:15:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: Adding to faq that reviewing a lesson after finishing is not possible&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Lesson}}&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I monitor my students&#039; / teachers&#039; actions in a Lesson?==&lt;br /&gt;
One way is to use [[Event monitoring]]. There are events for viewing content pages and answering question pages (students) and creating, updating and deleting pages (teachers).&lt;br /&gt;
==Jumps not working in a question==&lt;br /&gt;
A wrong answer should go to &amp;quot;this page&amp;quot; in my lesson. But after the student answers it, the student goes to the next page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the maximum attempt is set to 1, then the student will be advanced to the next page after they choose a wrong answer that is sent to &amp;quot;this page&amp;quot;. If it is set to 2, after the student selects the wrong answer the 2nd time they will be sent to the next page. This can be used to keep the student out of an endless loop when than can not answer a question correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
==Edits of answers are not saved==&lt;br /&gt;
I have a 4 answer multiple choice question. I can only seem to save the first two answers, their jumps and feedback. Any edits on the last answers, their jumps and feedbacks are not saved. Moodle does not tell me there is anything wrong. Same thing happened with a Content page. I can not seem to get the last two descriptions change after I save an edit. GRRRRR!&lt;br /&gt;
*Go back to your lesson settings. Maximum number of answers is probably set to 2; change it to 4 or the maximum number of answers or descriptions in your lesson. Now the edits can be saved.&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; Changing the &amp;quot;Maximum number&amp;quot; as a teacher builds a lesson is a trick used to limit scrolling passed unused answers or branch choices to get to the save button. For example, 15 pages have 4 choices but one page will have 8 choices. The teacher will use &amp;quot;Maximum number&amp;quot; at 8 setting only when they initially create that page, then switch it back to 4. They (and their students) will always see all 8 answers but the lesson setting will prevent them from editing some of them.&lt;br /&gt;
==Multiple Choice and Multianswer issues==&lt;br /&gt;
When I check the multianswer box in a multiple choice question, it does not work. It makes random jumps and does not put the teacher&#039;s response with the students choice. &lt;br /&gt;
*In a Lesson module [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|multianswer question]], all the correct choices must have the same jump and teacher response. All the wrong choices must also have the same jump and teacher response.&lt;br /&gt;
==Are there some examples of Lessons I can see?==&lt;br /&gt;
There are several examples of lessons on the School demo site http://school.moodledemo.net/ which you can access as a guest or log in to use it more interactively.&lt;br /&gt;
# A lesson about dyslexia: http://school.moodledemo.net/mod/lesson/view.php?id=752&lt;br /&gt;
# A decision making exercise on mountaineering : http://school.moodledemo.net/mod/lesson/view.php?id=432&lt;br /&gt;
#A lesson on understanding water shortages: http://school.moodledemo.net/mod/lesson/view.php?id=156&lt;br /&gt;
==The lesson was completed but it does not record it==&lt;br /&gt;
*Every lesson must have one question that a student must answer in order for it to show up in some reports. This can affect [[Grades]] and a Lesson&#039;s dependency setting (see other FAQs below).   &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; There are lots of creative ways to put in a question, such as setting a multiple choice question so that all answers are correct and the answers act like a content page. Or put in content and then award 1 point for &amp;quot;next page&amp;quot; as the answer and do not include the score in grades.&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; Due to a specific Lesson&#039;s design, some students can complete the lesson without answering one or more questions which have been placed in the Lesson. When Lesson can not record any scores for a student, no grade is pushed to the gradebook. It may appear therefore that Lesson is being inconsistent in recording grades.&lt;br /&gt;
==Dependency in Lesson does not work==&lt;br /&gt;
The second lesson tells the student they must complete the first one. They did - what is wrong?&lt;br /&gt;
*For dependency to work, you need to have at least 1 question page in the lesson. The student may not need a minimum score, but Lesson needs to know that the student tried a question. You can always put a question as the first or last page, You don&#039;t need to ask a question but do put in an answer of &amp;quot;continue&amp;quot; with a jump of the next page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Also for dependency to work, the lesson can not be a practice lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
==How to add sound to a lesson page==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Audio in Moodle]] has an overview and tool recommendations.&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I turn off the answer shuffle in a lesson?==&lt;br /&gt;
* In short, no. Turning off the page and answer shuffle are Quiz options, but neither is found in Lesson. A [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=99225 minor hack to the Lesson code] is possible but that would impact the entire Moodle site.&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; If you don&#039;t need to score students answers in a question, then consider using a Content page instead of a Multiple Choice or a True/False question.&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I change standard words used by Lesson?==&lt;br /&gt;
*Yes. You or your site administrator can edit the language file called Lesson.php. This will impact the whole site. Your site administrator might create a language just for you and then in Lesson settings use the force language option.&lt;br /&gt;
==Grrr something happened -lesson list is not right - I can&#039;t move things==&lt;br /&gt;
Try a backup and restore of your course to solve some of those &amp;quot;quirky&amp;quot; issues. &lt;br /&gt;
*Example: I was building a course, started adding lessons to topic 2 and then realized I should move it up to become Topic 1. Did that and continue to add lessons to topic 1, then lessons to topic 2 etc. Later I had to add lessons to topic 1. I did but could not move them between those first lessons I created. Every time I tried to move them they went to the bottom of topic 2! I also noticed that my list of just lessons, showed those first lessons as being in the correct course display order but showed they were in Topic 2!.&lt;br /&gt;
*Moral: Sometimes a backup and a restore will re-establish harmony and fix things.&lt;br /&gt;
==What happened to my HTML code on a Lesson page?==&lt;br /&gt;
I had the lesson page formatted just the way I wanted by using the HTML source toggle on the tool bar. I went back in to tweak my code and some of my code was missing!&lt;br /&gt;
*Lesson will &amp;quot;clean&amp;quot; up your HTML code every time you toggle into HTML text. This can be frustrating, especially if you are trying to get a flash file to display just right. Save you work in a text editor, so the next time you tweak it, you can paste all your code back in.&lt;br /&gt;
==Pages are not displayed in the lesson&#039;s left menu==&lt;br /&gt;
The Lesson module&#039;s left menu navigation feature, only displays content pages. If your lesson only has question pages, it will not display any pages. Use a content page before a series of question pages, so your students will know where the series starts. Alternative, use the same content page and put links to each of the question using descriptions and jumps. Remember, you can effectively have the student jump past (not view) this content page as they go through the lesson and only reach it via the left menu.&lt;br /&gt;
==Students are not returning to where they left the lesson==&lt;br /&gt;
A student has left the lesson after looking at 10 pages. The next time they return to the lesson they start at the beginning again. How can the student return to the same place?&lt;br /&gt;
:You have seen more than one page of this lesson already. Do you want to start at the last page you saw?&lt;br /&gt;
Several things must be met before this will happen. First make sure your lesson settings allow the student to retake the lesson and that this lesson is not a &amp;quot;practice&amp;quot; lesson. The important thing is that the above words are not exactly correct. They are correct only when the student left immediately after answering a question in a Lesson. For the purposes of returning to the same place, Lesson only remembers question pages as benchmarks. So lastly, make sure you have questions scattered in your Lesson for this feature to work and tell students.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIPs:&#039;&#039; Use a content page at the start of the lesson as a table of contents, so the student are forced to remember where they are but can jump to your teaching points. Or put a question at the start or end of every &amp;quot;teaching point&amp;quot;. And of course, you can tell your students how it is going to work.&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I change the End of Lesson page display==&lt;br /&gt;
Yes it is possible for the site administrator to change the text strings for all Lessons which use a specific language. For example, some sites do not want a student to see any reference to grades. By editing the correct text string, it is possible to replace &amp;quot;Your score is 9 (out of 10)&amp;quot; with &amp;quot;Be sure to get your certificate&amp;quot;. Or change &amp;quot;Congratulations - end of lesson reached&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;We hoped this lesson helped you&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; It is possible to force a language in a course in the Appearance settings. A site administrator can create a &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; language, with different text strings. This would allow different courses to have what appears to the student as different end of lesson pages. [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=220671 See this post for creating a new language based upon another.]&lt;br /&gt;
==Can a student review a lesson attempt after finishing it==&lt;br /&gt;
No, that is not possible. See https://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-19948&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?f=333 Lesson module forum]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Lektion_FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Lección FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:FAQ sur la leçon]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Using_Lesson&amp;diff=145495</id>
		<title>Using Lesson</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Using_Lesson&amp;diff=145495"/>
		<updated>2023-02-02T10:54:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: /* See also */ removing dead link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Lesson}}&lt;br /&gt;
This page explains how students and teachers can use the [[Lesson activity]] and explores ways to make the most of it in your Moodle course.&lt;br /&gt;
== What the student sees ==&lt;br /&gt;
*A student clicking on a Lesson will see an introductory page with one or more buttons which they choose from to select the path they wish to take.&lt;br /&gt;
*The display may vary according to how the teacher has set up the lesson in [[Lesson settings]]. For example; there may or may not be a list of pages down the side; there may or may not be an ongoing score.&lt;br /&gt;
*Students progress through the lesson with either content pages (of information, which is not graded) or various types of question pages (which may be graded). When a question page is used, the following page gives the answer and feedback if offered:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:studentviewoflesson.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
*The lesson is ended when the student has met the criteria set by the teacher. This could be answering a certain number of questions correctly, accessing a certain number of pages with content (text, audio or video) or following a certain navigational path. A final page appears where the student can check their score, if applicable, and return to the main course page.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:studentendoflesson.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If the gradebook is hidden from the student (via &#039;&#039;Course administration&amp;gt;Edit settings&#039;&#039;) or if the lesson is a practice lesson, then the &#039;View grades&#039; link will not be displayed. However, the score will still be displayed at the end of the lesson, unless it is a practice lesson:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:lessongradebookhidden.png|thumb|400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What the teacher sees==&lt;br /&gt;
*A teacher clicking on a lesson will see tabs at the top offering them the chance to preview, edit, view reports or grade essays in the lesson:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:teacherviewoflesson.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
===Preview===&lt;br /&gt;
*The lesson opens up in preview mode for the teacher. However, it will not show the score unless the teacher switches their role to a student.&lt;br /&gt;
===Edit===&lt;br /&gt;
*The Edit tab allows teachers to alter the lesson once it has been set up. There are two views - Collapsed and Expanded. See [[Building Lesson]] for more details on editing the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Reports===&lt;br /&gt;
*The reports tab shows the performance of students taking the lesson. There is a general &amp;quot;Overview&amp;quot; and a &amp;quot;Detailed Statistics&amp;quot; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
====Overview====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:lessonreportsoverview1.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the specific attempt, the teacher can view the student&#039;s answers to specific questions. It is also possible to delete a student attempt by checking the attempt and using the pull down menu to change &amp;quot;Choose&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;Delete&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Below the &amp;quot;Overview&amp;quot; can also be seen general statistics: Average score, Average time, High score, Low score, High time, Low time.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:lessonreportstatistics.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Detailed Statistics====&lt;br /&gt;
More detailed reports on individual questions are available from this tab, as in the following screenshot:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:lessonreportsdetailed.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grading lessons==&lt;br /&gt;
*Note that for a lesson to be graded, it must have at least one question where a student can receive a score and the lesson can not be a practice lesson. Grades are calculated when the student has completed a lesson. Grades are kept for every student attempt.&lt;br /&gt;
===Grading lesson essays===&lt;br /&gt;
*If a lesson essay question  has been included, the teacher can grade it from the Grade essays tab - #1 in the screenshot below - or from &#039;&#039;Lesson administration&amp;gt;Grade essays&#039;&#039; - #2 in the screenshot below. Media may be uploaded or audio or video recorded as part ofc the grading:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:gradelessonessays.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Completed essays are listed next to the students&#039; names:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:gradelessonessays1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Ungraded essays are red in colour -#1 in the screenshot below:&lt;br /&gt;
*When a teacher clicks on an essay and grades it, the colour changes to a yellow shade - #2 in the screenshot below:&lt;br /&gt;
*When a teacher clicks &#039;Email graded essays&#039; to notify the student, the colour changes to a green shade - #3 in the screenshot below:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:colourchangegradedessays.png|thumb|600px|center|Colour changes when grading essays]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Understanding Flow control==&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Lesson administration &amp;gt; Edit settings &amp;gt; Flow control group&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Here are some examples to help you understand the Lesson flow control settings. Please note:&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Allow student review&amp;quot; setting applies to the review of a whole Lesson, whereas &lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Provide option to try a question again&amp;quot; setting applies to the review of an individual question page. When the student does not select the correct answer, &#039;Provide option to try a question again&amp;quot; setting will display 2 buttons.  One will direct the student back to the question and the other to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Maximum number of attempts&amp;quot; is designed to prevent a student from being stuck on &amp;quot;This page&amp;quot; where they continually put or select the wrong answer.  It will override other settings, such as review or the option to try the question again.  When exceeded, it will not allow a score to be recorded for that question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Case 1 ====&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher wants the student to be able to attempt any question no more than 3 times and be given the chance to answer the question again.  The teacher wants the student to see the response attached to their answer.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Flow control settings&lt;br /&gt;
::Allow student review &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::Provide option to try a question again &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::Maximum number of attempts &#039;&#039;&#039;3&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::Display default feedback &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::Number of pages to show &#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::Slideshow &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Student selects wrong answer and will see:&lt;br /&gt;
:: &amp;quot;Response for the wrong answer&amp;quot; (if any is shown)&lt;br /&gt;
:: &amp;quot;Yes, I&#039;d like to try again&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
:: &amp;quot;Continue&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Student selects correct answer and will see:&lt;br /&gt;
:: &amp;quot;Response for the correct answer&amp;quot; (if any is shown)&lt;br /&gt;
:: &amp;quot;Continue&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Case 2 ====&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher wants to allow the student 3 attempts at all questions but not see any feedback except the site default feedback for wrong answers.&lt;br /&gt;
*Flow control settings&lt;br /&gt;
::Allow student review &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::Provide option to try a question again  &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::Maximum number of attempts &#039;&#039;&#039;3&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::Display default feedback &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
::Number of pages to show &#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::Slideshow &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Student selects wrong answer and will see:&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;Not quite.  Would you like to try again?&#039;&#039; as text over the&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;quot;Yes, I&#039;d like to try again&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&amp;quot;No, I just want to go on to the next question&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039; If the wrong answer jump is set to &amp;quot;This page&amp;quot; and the number of attempts is under the maximum, then the student will return to the question, regardless if they select &amp;quot;No, I just want to go on&amp;quot;.    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Student selects correct answer and will see:&lt;br /&gt;
:: &amp;quot;Your answer: {gives the student&#039;s answer)&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
:: Response attached to the correct answer (if any)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Case 3 ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Speed bump for speed clickers&amp;quot;.  Teacher only wants the student to get once chance to record an answer on any question.  They will only see the response the teacher provides for any question, or the default feedback if no response has been set for the answer the student selected.    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Flow control settings&lt;br /&gt;
::Allow student review &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::Provide option to try a question again &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::Maximum number of attempts &#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
::Display default feedback &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::Number of pages to show &#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::Slideshow &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Student selects wrong answer and will see:&lt;br /&gt;
:: &amp;quot;Response for the wrong answer&amp;quot; (if any is shown)&lt;br /&gt;
:: &amp;quot;Yes, I&#039;d like to try again&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
:: &amp;quot;Continue&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: &#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039; When teacher sets the Jump to &amp;quot;This page&amp;quot; for a wrong answer, they will return to the page but their score will not change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Student&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;quot;Response for the correct answer&amp;quot; (if any is show)&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;quot;Continue&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ideas for using Lessons==&lt;br /&gt;
*Because of its &amp;quot;branching&amp;quot; nature, the Lesson activity lends itself to a wide variety of activities, not all of which need to be graded. In addition to merely working through a list of question pages, here are some other suggestions:&lt;br /&gt;
====Self-directed learning of a new topic====&lt;br /&gt;
*Use the lesson to introduce a new topic. The learner starts out knowing nothing but can progress at his own pace, reviewing what he is not sure of and moving on when he feels ready. This can be much enhanced by...&lt;br /&gt;
====Allow for different learning styles====&lt;br /&gt;
*When using the lesson to introduce a new topic, offer pages that deliver the content in different ways, according to how the students prefer to learn. For example, the button &amp;quot;do you prefer to read?&amp;quot;  goes to a page of text; &amp;quot;do you prefer to watch a video?&amp;quot; goes to a screencast ; &amp;quot;do you prefer to listen to instructions?&amp;quot; -goes to a podcast and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
====Role play simulations/Decision-making exercises====&lt;br /&gt;
*Use the lesson to set up situations where the learner has to make a choice each time and the scenario changes according to their selection. This could be a medical emergency for example, deciding upon the correct treatment, or a customer relations exercise, learning how best to deal with an awkward client. In an educational establishment it could serve well in Humanities subjects considering moral/ethical issues.&lt;br /&gt;
====Interactive fiction====&lt;br /&gt;
*For younger (and not so younger!) students, the lesson can be used to create a &amp;quot;choose your own ending&amp;quot; type of story where the student reads a page (or even watches a video/listens to an audio file) and then decides upon the character&#039;s next move. Apart from the entertainment value of this, it could be used to help guide pre-teens to behave responsibly by taking decisions for a character who is in a potentially dangerous situation.&lt;br /&gt;
====Differentiated revision guides====&lt;br /&gt;
*Students can be taken to different sets of revision questions according to their answers, allowing them to progress from basic to intermediate to advanced according to their prior knowledge.&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=207365&amp;amp;parent=910023#p910107 Difference between Lesson and Book]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Afficher une leçon]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Lektion nutzen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Usando Lección]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:レッスンの利用]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Lesson_module/Lesson_questions&amp;diff=145493</id>
		<title>Lesson module/Lesson questions</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Lesson_module/Lesson_questions&amp;diff=145493"/>
		<updated>2023-01-30T15:41:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: /* Multiple choice */ max number of answers&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Work in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
*Other links [[Lesson module]] or [[Lesson module/draftoutline]][[Lesson module/draft]]&lt;br /&gt;
Lesson questions are similar but not exactly the same as Quiz questions. For example, Lesson questions have jumps, and also some types can be scored or evaluated differently than a similar Quiz question. In Moodle 2.0, Quiz and Lesson questions will be coming closer together. On this page we will refer you to other MoodleDoc pages about Questions types when they apply to a Lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
==Parts of a lesson question==&lt;br /&gt;
Parts of a Lesson question include title, content, answer, feedback and jump. Jumps are unique to the Lesson activity and can be thought of a links tied to answers. Like a Quiz question, each answer can be evaluated and scored differently. &lt;br /&gt;
===Multiple choice ===&lt;br /&gt;
In a multiple choice question, the student is given a question and a list of answers (max 4). In a Lesson, the answer list will be shuffled every time the question is view by a student. In a multiple choice question, the student selects one answer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Questions can use pictures. Indeed, pictures can be used as answers when the [[HTML editor]] is turned on and the page reloaded. Each answer in a multichoice question can be scored separately. It is possible to give a negative score for an answer, or partial credit for a wrong answer. The teacher can give a response based upon the answer selected by the student. &lt;br /&gt;
====With multianswer box checked====&lt;br /&gt;
A check in the multianswer box allows the teacher to determine that more than 1 answer is required for the student to receive credit for the question. There is no partial credit and the student must select just correct answers from a list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example of a multianswer question is:&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;Which of the following are animals&#039;&#039;&#039;?&lt;br /&gt;
::- A dog&lt;br /&gt;
::- A cow&lt;br /&gt;
::- A rock&lt;br /&gt;
::- A rose&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure the multianswer feature works, all correct answers should be in first lines of the answer list, receive the same score (let say 1), response and jump to the same page. Then wrong answers should hve the same score (usually 0), response and all jump to the same page. In other words, you should have two groups of answers (correct answers first and then incorrect ones) with the identical scores, responses and jumps for each group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A student who does not select all the correct answers, or includes any wrong answer will receive the &amp;quot;wrong answer&amp;quot; score, response and jump. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[Multiple Choice question type]] which is a quiz question and works differently.&lt;br /&gt;
===Short answer===&lt;br /&gt;
In a short answer question the student is expected to answer with one word or a few words. [[Short-Answer question type]] gives more information about this kind of question &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with Moodle 1.6, there are two different &#039;&#039;student answer&#039;&#039; analysis systems available for the Short Answer type of question in the Lesson Module: the &#039;&#039;&#039;simple system &#039;&#039;&#039; and the new &#039;&#039;&#039;regular expressions system&#039;&#039;&#039;. The simple system is the default and is the same used by the Quiz Module. There is a &amp;quot;Use Regular Expressions&amp;quot; option box on the Edit Question Page screen in the Lesson Module. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We suggest first reading about the [[Short-Answer question type|Short answer question page]] with the examples of the &amp;quot;simple analysis&amp;quot;, and then read the [[Short answer analysis]] page that gives more information about &amp;quot;Regular Expression analysis&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Table of Contents]]&lt;br /&gt;
===True / false===&lt;br /&gt;
The True/False question type is a special case of the multiple choice question. The student is prompted to choose which is the correct option. See [[Lesson module#Multiple choice|multiple choice question]] above for details.&lt;br /&gt;
===Matching questions===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Question Matching pulldown 1.JPG||thumb|80px|right|Matching]]&lt;br /&gt;
Matching questions consist of a list of names or statements, or pictures which must be correctly matched against another list. For example &amp;quot;Match the letter with its position in the alphabet. One list would have A, B, C, D, Z and the other in a pull down menu next to each item would have 2, 4, 3, 1, 26 . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unlike the &#039;&#039;Multichoice question&#039;&#039; where the choices are shown in a random order, the first list of items in a &#039;&#039;Matching question&#039;&#039; is not shuffled but shown in the same order as entered. The second list is scrambled. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1.9 there is one score, one response and one jump associated with the right answers (where all matches are correct) and one score, one response and one jump associated with a wrong match (where one or more are not matched correctly).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Matching question type]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
===Numerical Question===&lt;br /&gt;
This type of question requires a number as the answer. In it&#039;s simplest form it requires just one answer to be specified. For example &amp;quot;What is 2 plus 2?&amp;quot;, where 4 is the correct answer. A numerical question will also accept a number in a range as being correct. The answers are similar to short answer, where the order that the teacher lists the answers is important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Numerical question type]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lesson numerical question differs from the numerical quiz question and the numerical embedded question (Cloze), in a couple of ways when it evaluates answers. For example, there is no wild card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Table of Contents]]&lt;br /&gt;
===Essay Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
Short essay questions were introduced in Moodle version 1.5. These are meant for short, paragraph or two type of essays one often finds on exams. Thus we did not use the html editor, preferring a simple text field. For longer essays, the assignment module is a better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The student simply enters their essay in the box provided. The teacher sees ungraded essay questions when opening the lesson. After grading, the teacher can email their responses to the student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Essay question type]] page has more information.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Essay_question_type&amp;diff=145267</id>
		<title>Essay question type</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Essay_question_type&amp;diff=145267"/>
		<updated>2022-12-13T07:03:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: /* Question grading */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questions}}&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;: This page is about the essay question type in the [[Quiz]] activity. For information about the essay question type in a Lesson activity, see the documentation [[Building Lesson]].&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==About the essay question type==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The essay question type provides the option of answering by uploading one or more files and/or entering text online. (For longer essays, text or file uploads, you may wish to consider using the [[Assignment activity]] rather than this question type.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Essay questions are created in the same way as other quiz question types. The difference is that essay questions have to be marked manually, and the student will not get a final grade until the teacher has marked their essay.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating an essay question==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If you haven&#039;t yet made a quiz, access the [[Question bank]]  from &#039;&#039;Course administration&amp;gt;Question bank&#039;&#039; and click the button &#039;Create a new question&#039;, choosing &#039;Essay&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you have made a quiz, access the Edit quiz screen and from the &#039;&#039;Add&#039;&#039; drop down, choose &#039;Add a new question&#039;, choosing &#039;Essay&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Give the question a descriptive name - this allows you to identify it in the Question bank.&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter the question in the &#039;Question text&#039; field. This will be the title of and information about the essay you wish them to write.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set the &#039;default mark&#039; and any  &#039;General Feedback&#039; if required. This is text that appears to the student once you have graded their essay.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Response options===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;Response format&#039; allows you to choose what is available for the students when typing their essays, for example the regular WYSIWYG editor with or without the option to upload files, or a plain text editor (with no formatting.) &#039;&#039;No online text&#039;&#039; means they cannot type any text. You cannot select this if you don&#039;t allow attachments, as the students will have nothing to submit. If you have programming students, they may require &#039;&#039;plain text with monospaced font&#039;&#039; for their code. You should select &#039;HTML editor with file picker&#039; if you wish to provide the audio and video recording buttons in the HTML editor.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;Require text&#039; allows you to decide whether or not students must add text into the text editor when they do the question. If you only want them to upload a word-processed file as an essay, then you can set this to &#039;Text input is optional&#039;. &#039;&#039;(Note that this setting does not force the student to type text into the text editor; they can still leave it blank and continue to another question.)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;Accepted file types&#039; allows you to specify type(s) of file the students must upload.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;New in 3.11:&#039;&#039;&#039;  You can set a maximum and minimum word count for the Essay question. Learners will be alerted if they write too few or too many words.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EssayWordCount.png|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Response template===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible for a teacher to create a template to scaffold the student&#039;s answer in order to give them extra support. The template is then reproduced in the text editor when the student starts to answer the question. See  YouTube video [http://youtu.be/BAZa66WvyWQ Essay scaffold with the Moodle quiz] It is also possible to include grading information for teachers marking the essay to refer to as they assess the essays:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:responsetemplategraderinfo.png|thumb|400px|Response template and grader info set up]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:quizessaytemplate.png|thumb|400px|What the student sees]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:teacherviewessayq.png|thumb|400px|What the teacher sees]]&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
==Question grading==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The essay question will not be assigned a grade until it has been reviewed by a teacher and manually graded. Until that happens, the student&#039;s grade will be counted as 0 and shown as a - (dash).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To grade essays answer in quizzes using  the [[Boost theme]], click on the quiz and then, click the Results tab, in the dropdown menu choose &#039;Manual grading&#039;. For other themes, click  &#039;&#039;Manual grading&#039; from the Quiz results section of your quiz administration block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Manual_grading_Moodle_4.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then you can choose one question from that quiz, and grade that question for all the students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Manual grading question4 Moodle 4.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Manual grading for same question Moodle 4.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you choose the &#039;Responses&#039; tab, you can browse all the questions from all the students.. and you might discover (in the following image) that some students have nearly identical answers, which suggests cheating...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Manual grading questioncheating Moodle 4.png|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When manually grading an essay question, the grader is able to enter a custom comment in response to the essay and assign a score for the essay.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If necessary the teacher can also upload a file such as an image (or even record audio/video) in the essay grading box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=380839 Need help with understanding manual grading] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Essay (auto-grade) question type]] - additional plugin&lt;br /&gt;
* The [https://h5p.org/content-types/essay Essay module] for [https://moodle.org/plugins/mod_hvp H5P] - A free HTML5-based content type that allows students to receive instant feedback to a text that they have composed. Authors can define a set of keywords that will trigger individual responses if they are found or missing in the text. Let students become creative with H5P and Essay in Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[ca:Tipus de pregunta de resposta oberta]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Fragetyp Freitext]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tipo de pregunta de ensayo]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Question composition]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:作文問題タイプ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[zh:申論題]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=mod/cardbox/view&amp;diff=144330</id>
		<title>mod/cardbox/view</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=mod/cardbox/view&amp;diff=144330"/>
		<updated>2022-10-04T14:14:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: Created page with &amp;quot;More documentation on https://help.itc.rwth-aachen.de/en/service/8d9eb2f36eea4fcaa9abd0e1ca008b22/article/572e0d476dc440ff8ea288591b5b9186/&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;More documentation on https://help.itc.rwth-aachen.de/en/service/8d9eb2f36eea4fcaa9abd0e1ca008b22/article/572e0d476dc440ff8ea288591b5b9186/&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=error/moodle/invalidcoursemodule&amp;diff=144164</id>
		<title>error/moodle/invalidcoursemodule</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=error/moodle/invalidcoursemodule&amp;diff=144164"/>
		<updated>2022-09-05T05:45:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: Adding extra possibility why &amp;quot;course module invalid&amp;quot; can appear.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The ID for the course module is invalid.&lt;br /&gt;
Please contact the site admin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For some unknown reason, this happens sometimes when deleting a user. Clicking the back button of the browser and deleting the user again, makes the deleting process continue and delete the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It can also happen when &amp;quot;Legacy course files&amp;quot; is enabled. Disabling this can solve the issue.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Error]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:error/moodle/invalidcoursemodule]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=admin/setting/tool_cohortdatabase&amp;diff=144151</id>
		<title>admin/setting/tool cohortdatabase</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=admin/setting/tool_cohortdatabase&amp;diff=144151"/>
		<updated>2022-09-01T12:02:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: added cli options&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Documentation on https://github.com/catalyst/moodle-tool_cohortdatabase/blob/master/README.md&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Command line: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
php moodle/admin/tool/cohortdatabase/cli/sync.php&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* -h help&lt;br /&gt;
* -v verbose&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=admin/setting/tool_cohortdatabase&amp;diff=144139</id>
		<title>admin/setting/tool cohortdatabase</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=admin/setting/tool_cohortdatabase&amp;diff=144139"/>
		<updated>2022-08-30T06:26:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: Created page with &amp;quot;Documentation on https://github.com/catalyst/moodle-tool_cohortdatabase/blob/master/README.md&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Documentation on https://github.com/catalyst/moodle-tool_cohortdatabase/blob/master/README.md&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=User_tours&amp;diff=143997</id>
		<title>User tours</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=User_tours&amp;diff=143997"/>
		<updated>2022-08-11T08:12:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: /* Translating user tours */ removing pointer to outdated docs&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Site appearance}}&lt;br /&gt;
==About user tours==&lt;br /&gt;
User tours are step-by-step guides to various areas of Moodle. The [[Multi-language content filter|multi-lang filter]] allows for tours to display in different languages.&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/hhLVvyP3DU0 | desc = User tours}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How is it set up?==&lt;br /&gt;
* As an administrator, access  &#039;User tours&#039; from Site administration, Appearance.&lt;br /&gt;
*Here you see any existing user tours and have the option to create a new tour, import a tour or browse user tours on the [https://archive.moodle.net/mod/data/view.php?id=17 User tours repository]. (An administrator and a teacher tour have been added to new and upgraded sites to introduce the [[Boost theme]] and get you started.)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Usertours38.png|thumb|600px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*For each of your existing tours, you can click either directly on its name or on its View action icon to view its current listed steps&lt;br /&gt;
*Each tour can be individually enabled or disabled as required in its settings page.&lt;br /&gt;
*A &#039;Duplicate&#039; icon allows you to copy a tour to adapt it (new in 3.8).&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;You can have multiple tours created for the same page destination, but  you should only have one per page enabled at one time.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Tours will be displayed on any page whose URL matches the specified path value, for instance:&lt;br /&gt;
#/my/% - to match the Dashboard&lt;br /&gt;
#/course/view.php% - to match all courses&lt;br /&gt;
#/course/view.php?id=2 - to match a specific course (e.g. the course with id=2)&lt;br /&gt;
#/mod/forum/view.php% - to match the forum discussion list&lt;br /&gt;
#/user/profile.php% - to match the user profile page&lt;br /&gt;
#FRONTPAGE to use the tour on your site&#039;s home page.&lt;br /&gt;
*Each tour will be configured with default step settings which you can edit in the settings page:&lt;br /&gt;
*Placement: Top, Bottom (Default), Left, Right. This determines where the step shows relative to its matching block or CSS selector on the page.&lt;br /&gt;
*Show if target not found: No (Default), Yes. This determines whether the step is shown or not when the target has not been found.&lt;br /&gt;
*Show with backdrop: No (Default), Yes. If yes, the step appears surrounded by a darkened backdrop to emphasis its content and location.&lt;br /&gt;
*Move on click: No (Default), Yes. If yes, the tour continues to the next step when the user clicks within the block or area targeted by the current step.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;If you want users to be able to fill in forms as they work through the tour, then don&#039;t use a backdrop.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Tour filters allow you to choose the role(s) and theme(s) for which the tour will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I add steps to a tour ?==&lt;br /&gt;
* Either click directly on its name or on its View action icon to view the currently listed steps.&lt;br /&gt;
*Here are the initial steps for a sample tour for the Dashboard page:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:usertour steps page.png|thumb|600px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Click on the &#039;New step&#039; link and select what you want to highlight:&lt;br /&gt;
#Block - to display next to a matching block on the page. Select the block you want from the dropdown. (&#039;&#039;Note you can select blocks which are not available on your chosen area. If they are later added, then the tour will display that step.)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#CSS Selector - to display next to a matching selector on the page. Type in the relevant selector. (See examples below.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Display in the middle of the page&lt;br /&gt;
*Add the title and content&lt;br /&gt;
*For all types, select whether to display the step with a darkened backdrop&lt;br /&gt;
*For blocks or selectors, select the Placement option for where to place the display&lt;br /&gt;
*For blocks or selectors, select whether to display the step if its target isn&#039;t found&lt;br /&gt;
*For blocks or selectors, select whether to move on click, i.e. move to next step when target is clicked&lt;br /&gt;
*Click on &#039;Save changes&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do user tours work?==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:usertours01.png|thumb|600px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Once a user tour has been created and enabled, the first time that any user views a page which matches that user tour&#039;s page (path) settings, the user tour will automatically start to display, starting with the first step. Each tour step will display its title and content, along with three button options:&lt;br /&gt;
*Prev - to return to the previous step in the tour&lt;br /&gt;
*Next - to go to the next step in the tour&lt;br /&gt;
*End Tour - to exit out of the tour completely&lt;br /&gt;
Any time a user wishes to re-run the page&#039;s tour, they can click on the &amp;quot;Reset user tour on this page&amp;quot; link at the bottom of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
==Filters==&lt;br /&gt;
Tours may be filtered to display depending on: &lt;br /&gt;
*Access - a user tour may be restricted according to:&lt;br /&gt;
**Account creation&lt;br /&gt;
**First access&lt;br /&gt;
**Last access&lt;br /&gt;
*Category&lt;br /&gt;
*Courses&lt;br /&gt;
*Course format&lt;br /&gt;
*Role&lt;br /&gt;
*Theme&lt;br /&gt;
*CSS selector - the tour will only be shown when the specified CSS selector is found on the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Help with CSS selectors==&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to use CSS selectors as part of your user tour, your browser&#039;s developer tools will be very useful in helping you create these selectors:&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://developer.chrome.com/devtools#dom-and-styles Google Chrome]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Tools/DOM_Property_Viewer Mozilla Firefox]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://developer.microsoft.com/en-us/microsoft-edge/platform/documentation/f12-devtools-guide/ Microsoft Edge]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://developer.apple.com/library/content/documentation/AppleApplications/Conceptual/Safari_Developer_Guide/ResourcesandtheDOM/ResourcesandtheDOM.html#//apple_ref/doc/uid/TP40007874-CH3-SW1 Apple Safari]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Example of a very simple CSS selector===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CSS_selector_for_user_picture_in_a_user_tour.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The settings above will produce this in the user tour:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:user picture chosen by CSS selector in a user tour.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* How did we know that .userpicture would select just the Moodle user picture?&lt;br /&gt;
* By looking at the page with an HTML inspector in Firefox, as described in the &#039;Help with CSS selectors&#039; section above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other simple CSS selector examples===&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;.breadcrumb&#039;&#039;&#039; These site links (known as breadcrumbs) will always show where you are in the site and how to return to a main page, such as your Dashboard or your course main page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;.usermenu&#039;&#039;&#039;  This is the user menu. It contains links to your Dashboard, Messages, Profile, and your Preferences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;[value=&amp;quot;Customise this page&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039;  Add your own blocks of content by clicking here!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Multi-language capability==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your Moodle site is already set up or intending to be enabled for multi-lingual usage, tours are completely compatible with this requirement. Using the multi-lang filter formatting, each tour step&#039;s titles and content, displayed to the user, can be edited to cater for multi-lingual requirements. Please see [[Multi-language content filter]] for further detailed instructions on how to enable, format and submit multi-lingual strings for your Moodle site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please remember to go to &#039;&#039; Dashboard ► Site administration ► Plugins ► Filters ► Manage filters &#039;&#039; in order to enable the [[Multi-language content filter]] before importing any multi-language user tours into your site, or the users will see ALL the texts in ALL the languages simultaneously, as the following image illustrates:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Multilang user tour when multilang filter NOT properly configured.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When properly configured, a multi-language user tour will be automatically displayed in the user&#039;s preferred language, as seen in the following Dashboard tours starting pages in Spanish, English and French (in the same server):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Multilang user tour in Spanish.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Multilang user tour in English.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Multilang user tour in French.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Translating user tours==&lt;br /&gt;
User tours are translated together with the language pack. See [[Contributing_a_translation|contributing a translation]] when the default tours are not translated in your language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==A note about user tours and keyboard focus (tab stops)==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you test your user tour with the keyboard, you may notice that sometimes there appear to be two tab stops where there should be one. For example, if you have the HTML&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;my-link&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;https://moodle.org/&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Example link&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and use the CSS selector &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;.my-link&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for your tour step, then, while the tour is visible, it will appear that there are two tab stops for the one link. This is because the target of the tour is always made into a tab stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The way to avoid this is to target the tour at the link itself in your tour, using &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;.my-link a&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. The same thing applies in other similar situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Sharing user tours==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We really hope that you are able to create some really powerful tours to help guide your users around your site. We certainly think you will and we encourage you to share any of the tours you create with others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A number of user tours are available from the [https://archive.moodle.net/mod/data/view.php?id=17 archive.moodle.net User tours repository]. Coming soon is Moodle.net, where you will be able to share your own user tours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==User tour capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is just one capability, which is allowed for the default role of manager:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/tool/usertours:managetours|Create, edit and remove user tours]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://jsonlint.com/ JSONLint - a JSON validator] useful for checking the workings of a JSON file&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=357009 How to go to HTML Blocks in User Tour?] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=380950 User tours - can&#039;t get Dashboard User tours to work, using path &#039;/my/%&#039;] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tours para Usuarios]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Visites guidées]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Geführte Touren]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Starting_a_new_language_pack&amp;diff=143996</id>
		<title>Starting a new language pack</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Starting_a_new_language_pack&amp;diff=143996"/>
		<updated>2022-08-09T07:21:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: linking langconfig to user docs page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Translation}}&lt;br /&gt;
If Moodle is not yet translated into your language and you would like to help, please  [http://lang.moodle.org/login/signup.php create an account on the Translation site] and contact our Moodle translation coordinator, Koen Roggemans, [mailto:translation@moodle.org translation@moodle.org].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once your language pack has been set up, you can follow the instructions provided in [[Maintaining a language pack]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Make sure [[Translation_langconfig|langconfig]] is properly set up&#039;&#039;&#039;. It would be a very good idea to ask for other translators to double-check your translation of this extremely important file by posting a request in the [https://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=5 Translating Moodle forum].&lt;br /&gt;
* Take a look at [[Translation priority]]. All files have a rating according to how urgent they need translating.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have any questions about using AMOS, please post in the [http://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=5 Using AMOS forum].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Starting a child language of an existing language pack==&lt;br /&gt;
If your country uses a variation of an existing language, that has a few (or many) differences from an [https://docs.moodle.org/dev/Translation_langconfig#parentlanguage.2Ccore_langconfig existing parent language] (ie, Canadian French is a variation of French, or US English has some spelling differences from UK English), a child language might be a good solution, as only the strings that need changes have to be uploaded to AMOS.&lt;br /&gt;
Some examples of existing child languages and the changes from the parent language for Moodle 4.0 are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Català (Valencià) , 4416 changes from ca&lt;br /&gt;
*Dansk (kursus) , 22 changes from da&lt;br /&gt;
*Dansk Rum , 857 changes from da&lt;br /&gt;
*Davvisámegiella , 7235 changes from no&lt;br /&gt;
*Deutsch community , 246 changes from de_du&lt;br /&gt;
*Deutsch - Du , 1051 changes from de&lt;br /&gt;
*Deutsch - Kids , 273 changes from de_du&lt;br /&gt;
*English - Pirate , 1545 changes from en&lt;br /&gt;
*English for kids , 75 changes from en&lt;br /&gt;
*English - United States , 705 changes from en&lt;br /&gt;
*Español de México para niños , 140 changes from es_mx&lt;br /&gt;
*Español Venezuela , 157 changes from es&lt;br /&gt;
*Filipino , 945 changes from tl&lt;br /&gt;
*Finlandssvenska , 3049 changes from sv&lt;br /&gt;
*Français - Canada , 973 changes from fr&lt;br /&gt;
*Hebrew kids , 1284 changes from he&lt;br /&gt;
*Japanese kids , 117 changes from ja.&lt;br /&gt;
*Kalaallisut , 561 changes from da&lt;br /&gt;
*Lithuanian (university) , 13414 changes from lt&lt;br /&gt;
*Lulesamisk , 8 changes from no&lt;br /&gt;
*Norsk , 798 changes from no&lt;br /&gt;
*Norsk - nynorsk , 3608 changes from no&lt;br /&gt;
*Sørsamisk , 8 changes from no&lt;br /&gt;
*Suomi+ , 983 changes from fi&lt;br /&gt;
*Wolof , 203 changes from fr&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your local language only has a few differences from an existing language, it still qualifies as a different language for Moodle, and it can have its own language pack (if someone is willing to create and maintain it).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Defining the language code==&lt;br /&gt;
For historical reasons we use the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_ISO_639-1_codes ISO-639-1] code for the representation of the language. If that doesn&#039;t exist, we use the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_ISO_639-3_codes ISO639-3 code] (e.g. Moroccan Tamazight).&lt;br /&gt;
In some exceptional cases, like the Occitan languages, we combine the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_ISO_639-1_codes ISO 639-1] code with the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_ISO_639-6_codes ISO 639-6] code, eg oc_gsc (keep in mind that the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_ISO_639-6_codes ISO 639-6] standard is [http://www.iso.org/iso/catalogue_detail?csnumber=43380 withdrawn]).&lt;br /&gt;
Other exceptions includes the _kids addition for language packs for very young children and some other exceptions. These exceptions should be kept to a minimum.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Talk:Language_settings&amp;diff=143993</id>
		<title>Talk:Language settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Talk:Language_settings&amp;diff=143993"/>
		<updated>2022-08-05T11:06:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===Language selection priority===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This figure shows Moodle priority when selecting languages and should help you understand the relationship of the various settings for Site, Course, and User.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:mdl_lang_selection_priority.png|640px|Moodle language selection priority]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: Seems like a good scheme, making the process clear, Ralph. Thank you for that. Can you add it to the article? --[[User:koen roggemans|koen roggemans]] ([[User talk:koen roggemans|talk]]) 11:06, 5 August 2022 (UTC)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dead links===&lt;br /&gt;
Do you want something like this? https://www.shellhacks.com/linux-define-locale-language-settings/ or this https://www.tecmint.com/set-system-locales-in-linux/&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Translation_langconfig&amp;diff=143990</id>
		<title>Translation langconfig</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Translation_langconfig&amp;diff=143990"/>
		<updated>2022-08-05T10:23:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: /* decsep,core_langconfig */ adding link to decimal separator page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Translation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Langconfig is an important file in a language pack, dealing with all the configuration parameters of that language. It is good practice to review this first when starting of a new language pack or when taking on responsibility of an existing language pack. You can edit it by going to lang.moodle.org and find it as the core_langconfig component for your language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you find a little documentation for each setting to help you deciding what should go there for your language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===alphabet,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The alphabet in your language. Used e.g. for the list of letters on the participants page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===am,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The way to indicate morning in your language. This is used on servers that only support 24 hour time for your language. (see https://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-74379).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===amcaps,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The way to indicate moring in capitals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===backupnameformat,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===decsep,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How decimals are separated in your language. [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Decimal_separator Usually a dot or a comma]. Take note that some countries which seem to share the same language may have a different character to separate the integer part from the fractional part of a number written in decimal form. e.g. Central American Spanish-speaking countries use the decimal point, while South American Spanish-speaking countries use the decimal comma. More info on the [[Decimal separator]] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example:&lt;br /&gt;
 * English: 36.5&lt;br /&gt;
 * Dutch: 36,5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===firstdayofweek,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The first day of the week in your language. Allowed values are 0,1,2,3,4,5,6, where 0 stands for Sunday.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===iso6391,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The ISO 639.1 value for your language. You can find this value easily on [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_ISO_639-1_codes Wikipedia].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===iso6392,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The ISO 639.2 value for your language. You can find this value easily on [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_ISO_639-2_codes Wikipedia].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===labelsep,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How a label is separated from a form. Could be a colon, a space and a colon or something different, according to what&#039;s generally used in your language. This character is not read by screen readers for accessibility reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===listsep,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The symbol usually used in your language, for separating items in a list. This is used e.g. when using formulas with multiple items in the gradebook. This must be a symbol different from the decsep symbol.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===locale,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
locale for *nix servers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your Moodle calendar is not translated, then this string is wrong (or your server is not configured to support the language)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Locales, used in language packs should come only from the table of locales at https://docs.moodle.org/dev/Table_of_locales and the list at https://docs.moodle.org/dev/List_of_locales_supported_on_Moodle_community_servers}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An unsupported locale in a Mac or Linux site will produce the following error when you try to update your language pack:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Unsupported locale mac.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And, more important, it may produce an intermitent &#039;undefined&#039; error message:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ERROR undefined.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===localecldr,core_lanconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See http://cldr.unicode.org/index/cldr-spec/picking-the-right-language-code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===localewin,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
locale for Windows servers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your Moodle calendar is not translated, then this string is wrong (or your server is not configured to support the language). There are quite a few languages that are not supported by Windows servers and the localewin server can not be set. In that case, you have to run your Moodle on a *nix server to make the translation of your Moodle calendar work&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===localewincharset,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The character set to use when Moodle is installed on a Windows server&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===oldcharset,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
Necessary to upgrade from prior to 1.6. This string defines the charset used in 1.5 and earlier for this language pack. For language packs that start later then Moodle 1.5, this can be left empty&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===parentlanguage,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The original Moodle default Australian language pack has this field empty (as the Australian English language IS the official Moodle language).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your language pack relies on another one (it is a &#039;child&#039; language of a &#039;parent&#039; language), then this is the place to point out which language pack. &#039;&#039;&#039;For most language packs, this should be left empty&#039;&#039;&#039;, to default to English if strings are missing. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: Canadian French (fr_ca) is mostly the same as French (fr) apart from a few changes. Creating a language pack with as parent language French will shop French if a string does not exist in the language pack Canadian French. If a string doesn&#039;t exist in both language packs, English is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the download page for the language packs (https://download.moodle.org/langpack/3.7/) you can see how many strings are different from the parent language pack. In Moodle 3.7, Canadian French had 998 changes from French.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Using language customization for parentlanguage inside langconfig.php in an existing Moodle server, where you add a parent language (while the AMOS parentlanguage string is actually empty) will ask for the installation of said parent language in the server, but will not substitute the missing translations in the child language with those of the parent language; English will be shown. Surgically editing (a dangerous, never recommended procedure) the langconfig.php file of the server would work, until the next language pack update -manual or cron made-  erases the change.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===pm,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The way to indicate afternoon in your language. This is used on servers that only support 24 hour time for your language. (see https://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-74379).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===pmcaps,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The way to indicate afternoon in capitals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedate,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedatefullshort,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedateshort,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedatetime,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedatetimeshort,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedaydate,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedaydatetime,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedayshort,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and day are displayed in short in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedaytime,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and day are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimemonthyear,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How month and year are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimerecent,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimerecentfull,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed for recent activities in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimetime,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time is displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===thisdirection,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
In which direction your language should be displayed on the screen. The only possible options are ltr (left to right) or rtl (right to left).&#039;&#039;&#039;Do not attempt to translate these&#039;&#039;&#039;, or [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=328567#p1323101 you will wreak havoc on many themes].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===thisdirectionvertical,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How text that is printed vertical on the screen is oriënted (like in a docked block).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only possible values can be btt (bottom to top) or ttb (top to bottom). &#039;&#039;&#039;Do not attempt to translate these&#039;&#039;&#039;, or [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=328567#p1323101 you will wreak havoc on many themes].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===thislanguage,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The name of your language in your own language&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===thislanguageint,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The name of your language in English&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===thousandssep,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How you separate thousands in your language.&lt;br /&gt;
Important: this can not be a space (more information in discussion http://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=1450#p1730). If you want a space, you can try with &amp;amp;amp;nbsp; but that is not fully tested yet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
 * in Dutch 1.000.000 (with a dot)&lt;br /&gt;
 * in English 1,000,000 (with a comma)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Langconfig]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Translation_FAQ&amp;diff=143989</id>
		<title>Translation FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Translation_FAQ&amp;diff=143989"/>
		<updated>2022-08-05T10:20:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: /* Can the subtitles for Moodle HQ YouTube videos be translated? */ This doesn&amp;#039;t exist anymore&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Translation}}&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I help with translating Moodle?==&lt;br /&gt;
Please see the guide [[Contributing a translation]].&lt;br /&gt;
==I&#039;ve found an error in a language pack. What do I do?==&lt;br /&gt;
* You are welcome to [[Contributing a translation|contribute a fix]] for the error. Alternatively you can contact the language pack maintainer as listed in the [http://lang.moodle.org/local/amos/credits.php Translation credits].&lt;br /&gt;
* English language string typo fixes and suggested improvements can be [[Improving English language strings|contributed to the English (fixes) (en_fix) language pack]].&lt;br /&gt;
==The month names and days are displayed in English. How can I translate them?==&lt;br /&gt;
This is neither Moodle bug nor a missing translation. Names of days and months are pulled out of your operating system. Your server, where the Moodle is running, does not seem to have the specific [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Locale_(computer_software) locale] installed. You need to contact the server administrator and ask them to install the needed locale. See [[Table of locales]] for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The particular locale to use for the given language is configured in the langconfig.php file in strings &#039;&#039;locale&#039;&#039; (for Unix like operating systems) and &#039;&#039;localewin&#039;&#039; (for Windows operating systems).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On Ubuntu/Debian, the package &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;locale-all&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; can be installed to support all existing languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mac OS is known to have a very limited support for locales. This can not be fixed.&lt;br /&gt;
==Why are log descriptions displayed in English?==&lt;br /&gt;
In log reports, descriptions are intended to be displayed in English only; it is not possible to translate them. For example &amp;quot;The user with id &#039;2&#039; viewed the course with id &#039;4&#039;.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
==I&#039;m starting a new language pack or I&#039;m contributing to one. Can I do the user interface strings first?==&lt;br /&gt;
No, there is no way to know which strings will be shown for users and which not. But to help you a little bit, there are some unofficial priorities you can take into account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First:&lt;br /&gt;
* make sure [[Translation_langconfig|langconfig]] is properly set up.&lt;br /&gt;
* take a look at [[Translation priority]]. All files have a rating according to how urgent they need translating.&lt;br /&gt;
* less urgent are also the contributed plugins, since they are not part of a standard Moodle distribution. There is a list of [https://moodle.org/plugins/stats.php the 20 top plugins downloads for Moodle] which might be worth considering for translation priority.&lt;br /&gt;
==How many words are there in the English language pack?==&lt;br /&gt;
See the discussion [http://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=3651 How many words are there in the English language pack?].&lt;br /&gt;
==Moodle languages with several available language packs==&lt;br /&gt;
===Are there translations for the American (and other branches of the) English language?===&lt;br /&gt;
The [http://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=2617 &amp;quot;official&amp;quot;] language for Moodle is actually Australian English (&#039;&#039;G&#039;day mate!&#039;&#039;) , which is almost 100% the same as UK English. [http://english.stackexchange.com/questions/74737/what-is-the-origin-of-the-phrase-two-nations-divided-by-a-common-language Someone] once said &amp;quot;America and England are two nations divided by a common language&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* The English - United States (en_us)] language pack mostly contains different spellings (color &#039;&#039;versus&#039;&#039; colour, enroll &#039;&#039;versus&#039;&#039; enrol etc).&lt;br /&gt;
* The English - Pirate (en_ar)] language pack is used in the &#039;[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=132888 Talk Like a Pirate]&#039; day.&lt;br /&gt;
* The English - United States K12 (en_us_k12) language pack is used in the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/K%E2%80%9312 K-12] (kindergarten to grade 12) primary and secondary education in the USA, Canada, and other English speaking countries. It includes spellings from the en_us language pack and the term &amp;quot;course&amp;quot; is renamed as &amp;quot;class&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* The English for kids (en_kids) language pack seems to be a simplified version of the most common English strings seen by Moodle users, considered easier/suitable for small children.&lt;br /&gt;
* The English (fixes) (en_fix) language pack is used to suggest Moodle core language strings improvements and typo fixes, as described in the guide [[Improving English language strings]].&lt;br /&gt;
===Why does Moodle have four different language packs for the German language?===&lt;br /&gt;
* In Germany we have a formal language where people are talking with „Sie“ to each other. This is the language of the formal adults. I think it’s something like using „Sir“ in english language. The normal German language pack is using this formal language. Nearly all strings in the Moodle language pack and in the translated plugins are translated in the formal language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You can’t use these formal words in school … there you are using an informal language with „du“. Students are talking to each other like friends. Therefor we made the language pack „German personal“ (de_du). It come with the personal words „du“, „dein“, „dir“ and so on where the formal words are „Sie“, „Ihre“, „Ihnen“ (yes, these words are written with an uppercase letter).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* For my (Ralf Krause) personal use I take „German personal&amp;quot; (de_du) or „German Kids“ (de_kids). „German Kids“ uses the personal words „du“, „dein“ and „dir“ but it also uses an easier to understand language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Some time ago we tried to make Moodle as a platform for social communication but nobody wanted to use it. Therefore we made &amp;quot;German community“. In a social platform, nobody would talk about teachers or students or participants or classrooms or courses … in a social platform, you would use members of a group and meetings. I don’t know if this pack will be used in future.&lt;br /&gt;
===Why does Moodle have several different language packs for the Spanish language?===&lt;br /&gt;
* Spain and many South American countries use a (comma) [[Decimal separator]] that is different from the (decimal point) used in Mexico and Central America.&lt;br /&gt;
** Moodle core in English uses by default a decimal point for calculations, and Moodle Docs do too.&lt;br /&gt;
** This caused many problems in the [[Gradebook]] calculations and with the [https://docs.moodle.org/all/es/P%C3%A1gina_Principal Spanish Moodle Docs].&lt;br /&gt;
* Just as &amp;quot;America and England are two nations divided by a common language&amp;quot;, so are Spain and Mexico. See [https://docs.moodle.org/all/es/Espa%C3%B1ol_de_M%C3%A9xico the Mexican Spanish documentation page] in Spanish.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Venezuelan Spanish (es_ve) is a very small child language of the international Spanish language.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Colombian Spanish (es_co) is a very small child language of the international Spanish language.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Mexican Spanish (es_mx) is a very modern, comprehensive, independent, language pack, specially made for Mexican Moodlers.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Mexican Spanish for kids (es_mx_kids) is a simplified version of the most common Mexican Spanish strings seen by Moodle users, considered easier/suitable for small children.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can read about [https://docs.moodle.org/all/es/Espa%C3%B1ol_internacional#Idiomas_hijos_que_depend.C3.ADan_del_Espa.C3.B1ol_internacional two (now defunct) other Spanish child languages].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why do other languages have child languages?===&lt;br /&gt;
* Languages with &#039;&#039;-kids&#039;&#039; in their code names are all child languages with a simplified version of common language strings aimed at small children. &lt;br /&gt;
* If you have the time, it is probably a good idea to have one such child language for kids for your main language pack. &lt;br /&gt;
* Current (mid 2022) languages for kids are:&lt;br /&gt;
** Deutsch (kids) &lt;br /&gt;
** English (kids)&lt;br /&gt;
** Español de México para niños (Mexican Spanish for kids)&lt;br /&gt;
** Ελληνικά για παιδιά (Greek for kids)&lt;br /&gt;
** עברית בתי־ספר (Hebrew for kids)&lt;br /&gt;
** हिंदी (Hindi for kids)&lt;br /&gt;
** Japanese (kids)&lt;br /&gt;
** Deutsch - Kids&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Norwegian (Primary) language pack is aimed at primary education.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Finnish for companies is aimed at companies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Languages ending in &amp;quot;_wp&amp;quot; are supplementary languages for [https://docs.moodle.org/37/en/Moodle_Workplace Moodle Workplace]. They are maintained by the companies offering [https://docs.moodle.org/37/en/Moodle_Workplace Moodle Workplace].&lt;br /&gt;
==Are there items which are NOT to be translated?==&lt;br /&gt;
===Moodle variables enclosed within {curly brackets}===&lt;br /&gt;
The following words, when enclosed within {curly brackets}, are placeholders for Moodle names of variables. They should not be translated, but must remain as they are within the curly brackets:&lt;br /&gt;
 firstname, lastname, username, email, city, country, lang, timezone, mailformat, maildisplay, maildigest, htmleditor, ajax, autosubscribe , institution, department, idnumber, skype , msn, aim, yahoo, icq, phone1, phone2, address, url, description, descriptionformat, password, auth, oldusername , deleted, suspended, course1, course2, course3, course4&lt;br /&gt;
They must also be written exactly like this in all translations of the documentation pages (such as this page.) However, the translator might like to include a translation enclosed in brackets. For example, in the Spanish documentation pages you might find: password (&#039;&#039;contraseña&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fact is: &#039;&#039;&#039;no placeholders can be translated in AMOS&#039;&#039;&#039;. There is no official list of &amp;quot;reserved&amp;quot; $a properties. Whatever xyz is put in {$a-&amp;gt;xyz}, it must be kept as it is in AMOS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: 26 AMOS fullnamedisplay_core original.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Must&#039;&#039;&#039; be (in this case, when translated into Mexican Spanish):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:26 AMOS fullnamedisplay_core.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
unless your language uses lastname before the firstname, as Japanese does, which translates to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:26 AMOS fullnamedisplay_core Japanese.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Placeholders enclosed within % characters (%example%) must not be translated===&lt;br /&gt;
The [https://moodle.org/plugins/local_moodlecloudsignup Moodle Cloud Signup and Portal strings] local plugin is used for accessing the [https://moodle.com/cloud/ MoodleCloud] and it includes several strings that have some words surrounded by % characters (eg, %date%). These words must not be translated, they must be copied exactly into the language pack translation, but the rest of the string might or might not be translated.&lt;br /&gt;
* Example of one string that can not be translated and must be copied exactly:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AMOS placeholders with percentace character.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Example of one string with one placeholder (highlighted) and some regular text that can be easily translated:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AMOS text with placeholders with percentace character.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
===Placeholders in H5P prefixed with % or : characters must not be translated===&lt;br /&gt;
The [http://h5p.org/ H5P editor] integrated with Moodle since 3.9 has some variables prefixed with &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;:&amp;quot; that must not be translated because they are transformed internally with the correct value. They should be treated as the Moodle curly brackets variables.&lt;br /&gt;
* Example of variables with &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; that can not be translated and must be copied exactly:&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;Parameters contain %used while only %supported or earlier are supported.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
  In that case, %used and %supported must not be translated. So, for instance, the Spanish translation would be something like:&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;Parámetros contiene %used mientras que sólo se soportan %supported o anterior.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* Example of variables with &amp;quot;:&amp;quot; that can not be translated and must be copied exactly:&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;The :property value exceeds the maximum of :max.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
  In that case, :property and :max must not be translated. The Spanish translation for this string would be something like:&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;El valor de :property excede el máximo de :max.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
=== All fieldnames must be kept in English===&lt;br /&gt;
* These names are hooks that are used in the software. You should not translate them.&lt;br /&gt;
* See the example below for the string uploadcourses_help in the file tool_uploadcourse for Moodle 3.1:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fieldnames are not to be translatd.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Notice that the string text indicates (red rectangle) that these words (enclosed in green rectangles) are fieldnames. Also notice that the Spanish translation clearly indicates, at the final part of the paragraph &#039;&#039;(así escritos, en inglés)&#039;&#039; that these fieldnames must be written in English as they are written here.&lt;br /&gt;
* Some used fieldnames in Moodle are:&lt;br /&gt;
 category, category_id, category_idnumber, category_path, context, course, description, descriptionformat, email, enrolmentkey, firstname, fullname, groupname, hidepicture, idnumber, intro, lastname, maxgrade, maxrequest, name, password, picture, section, shortname, teachers, timeopen, timeclose, timeend, timestart, username, visible, &lt;br /&gt;
* Examples of strings where these fielnames appear are uploadcohorts_help | core_cohort, importgroups_help | core_group, uploadcourses_help | tool_uploadcourse and uploadusers_help | tool_uploaduser.&lt;br /&gt;
* Note that these fieldnames may appear as real fieldnames (must not be translated) or as regular words in another context (can and must be translated). You should exercise caution and, If possible, always check that Moodle works correctly by testing your translations with some data in a real or test server.&lt;br /&gt;
===Local addresses after &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;../===&lt;br /&gt;
Addresses inside a Language string that have &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;../ reference a specific URL inside your Moodle server and you must keep the address part of the expression, but you can translate the descriptive name part. See the following example:&lt;br /&gt;
 noassignableroles | tool_cohortautoroles&lt;br /&gt;
 There are currently no roles that can be assigned in the user context. &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;../../roles/manage.php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Manage roles&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* You must keep the &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;../../roles/manage.php&amp;quot;&amp;gt; part, as this references to the [https://docs.moodle.org/31/en/PHP PHP] code in your Moodle server that will be executed in order to manage roles&lt;br /&gt;
* You can/should/must translate &#039;Manage roles&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not forget to keep the ending &amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Moodle Docs addresses after &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;http://docs.moodle.org/en/&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;===&lt;br /&gt;
Addresses inside a Language string that have &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;http://docs.moodle.org/en/ &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;reference a specific URL in the Moodle English Documentation. You must look at that address and &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; if your language has a valid translation for that page, you can/should replace the original English Docs address with your own language address. See the following example:&lt;br /&gt;
 core backup | nonisowarning&lt;br /&gt;
 Warning: this backup is from a non-Unicode version of Moodle (pre 1.6). If this backup contains any non-ISO-8859-1 texts then they may be CORRUPTED if you try to restore them to this Unicode version of Moodle. See the &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;http://docs.moodle.org/en/Backup_FAQ&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Backup FAQ&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt; for more information about how to recover this backup correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
* There are six different language translations for that page. So, you can only replace this address if your language is one of these.&lt;br /&gt;
===Other internet addresses after &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;http://===&lt;br /&gt;
* You must proceed as with Moodle Docs addresses:&lt;br /&gt;
* Example:&lt;br /&gt;
 auth_radius | auth_radiusdescription&lt;br /&gt;
 This method uses a &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/RADIUS&amp;quot;&amp;gt;RADIUS&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt; server to check whether a given username and password is valid.&lt;br /&gt;
* You must check the (English language wikipedia) page about the RADIUS server, and then you can decide whether to keep this address or replace it with your own language matching wikipedia translation.&lt;br /&gt;
===HTML codes that must not be translated===&lt;br /&gt;
The following HTML codes are reserved words that must not be translated. However, it is important for the translators to understand their meaning in order to decide whether to keep them in the translation and if so, whether they can be rearranged.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - non-breaking space i.e. a space but there will never be a line-break inserted instead of this space at the end of a line.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;ensp&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;emsp&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - denote an en space and an em space respectively, where an en space is half the point size and an em space is equal to the point size of the current font. For fixed pitch fonts, the user agent can treat the en space as being equivalent to a single space character, and the em space as being equuivalent to two space characters. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;amp&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - ampersand sign (&amp;amp;)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;apos&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - apostrophe sign (&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;copy&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - copyright sign (©)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;plusmn&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - &amp;quot;plus or minus&amp;quot; sign (±)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;times&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - multiply sign (*)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;divide&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - divide sign (/)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - &amp;quot;greater than&amp;quot; sign ( &amp;gt; )&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - &amp;quot;less than&amp;quot; sign (&amp;lt;) &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;laquo&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - quotation mark (‘)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lsquo&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - left single quotation sign (‘)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;rsquo&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - right single quotation sign (’)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;ouml&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - small letter o with diaeresis (ö)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;mdash&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash#Em_dash em dash] sign (—)&lt;br /&gt;
===Calculation functions must not be translated===&lt;br /&gt;
[https://docs.moodle.org/32/en/Grade_calculations#Calculation_functions Calculation functions] start with an equal sign (=). Following is an expression using operators and functions supported by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DO NOT translate calculation functions.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
===The &#039;thisdirection&#039; and &#039;thisdirectionvertical&#039; strings in core_langconfig should never be translated===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The &#039;thisdirection&#039; and &#039;thisdirectionvertical&#039; strings in core_langconfig should never be translated, as they are not variables meant to be translated. They are prefixing selectors used by the themes to display left-to-right or right-to-left languages. Read [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=328567#p1323101 more about problems with these variables].&lt;br /&gt;
===MoodleBox===&lt;br /&gt;
The word &#039;MoodleBox&#039; must be kept in all languages.&lt;br /&gt;
===Safe Exam Browser===&lt;br /&gt;
A feedback by the Safe Exam Browser main developer:&lt;br /&gt;
 The software is called “Safe Exam Browser” in any language, we don’t translate the name of the application. So it doesn’t make sense to translate it in any plugin, you could use it as a subtitle or in brackets, like “Safe Exam Browser (Navegador de Examen Seguro)”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Is there a way to check the integrity of all placeholders in a language pack?==&lt;br /&gt;
* Not a at the moment. See MDL-51775 .&lt;br /&gt;
* You can use [https://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=4661 this trick] to check for integrity:&lt;br /&gt;
** Load the language pack in a [https://download.moodle.org/windows/ local instance of Moodle].&lt;br /&gt;
**   In order to generate a [https://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=4098 translation memory], load the language pack in the [https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/Language_customisation Language customization] tool, so that the texts are loaded in the database.&lt;br /&gt;
**    Run the sql instance in the file (tm_generator.txt)&lt;br /&gt;
**    Insert the result of the query in template.tmx file&lt;br /&gt;
** The result is a translation memory that can be analysed with [http://www.opentag.com/okapi/wiki/index.php?title=CheckMate Checkmate].&lt;br /&gt;
** The problem: probably you will get many errors due to some characters that are not allowed by Checkmate so you will have to remove manually some translation units. After doing it, you will get a report with some possible errors (see the attached image).&lt;br /&gt;
** Of course, it would be great to have an integrated quality check system in Moodle. Vote for MDL-51775 .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The contents of the file tm_generator.txt are (&#039;&#039;&#039;change the language from eu to your language&#039;&#039;&#039;):&lt;br /&gt;
 SELECT concat(&#039;&amp;lt;tu tuid=&amp;quot;&#039;,mdl_tool_customlang_components.name,&#039;|&#039;,mdl_tool_customlang.stringid,&#039;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;tuv xml:lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;seg&amp;gt;&#039;,mdl_tool_customlang.original,&#039;&amp;lt;/seg&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tuv&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;tuv xml:lang=&amp;quot;&#039;,mdl_tool_customlang.lang,&#039;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;seg&amp;gt;&#039;,mdl_tool_customlang.master,&#039;&amp;lt;/seg&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tuv&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/tu&amp;gt;&#039;) as txt&lt;br /&gt;
 FROM mdl_tool_customlang INNER JOIN mdl_tool_customlang_components ON mdl_tool_customlang.componentid =  mdl_tool_customlang_components.id&lt;br /&gt;
 WHERE (((mdl_tool_customlang.lang)=&amp;quot;eu&amp;quot;) AND ((mdl_tool_customlang.original) Is Not Null) AND ((mdl_tool_customlang.master)  &amp;lt;&amp;gt;mdl_tool_customlang.original));&lt;br /&gt;
* the contents of the template.tmx file are:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;?xml version=&amp;quot;1.0&amp;quot; encoding=&amp;quot;UTF-8&amp;quot;?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tmx version=&amp;quot;1.4&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;header creationtool=&amp;quot;SQLQuery&amp;quot; creationtoolversion=&amp;quot;unknown&amp;quot; segtype=&amp;quot;paragraph&amp;quot; o-tmf=&amp;quot;unknown&amp;quot; adminlang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; srclang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; datatype=&amp;quot;unknown&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/header&amp;gt;&amp;lt;body&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 PLACE HERE THE RESULT OF THE SQL QUERY&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/body&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/tmx&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==What is a &#039;&#039;translation memory&#039;&#039; and how can I create a translation memory out of a Moodle language pack?==&lt;br /&gt;
* Read the &#039;Is there a way to check the integrity of all placeholders in a language pack?&#039; section above.&lt;br /&gt;
* See [https://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/user.php?id=1489&amp;amp;page=1 this post] and [https://dl.dropboxusercontent.com/u/86242384/moodle/en/publish/moodle_tm/website_index.html this tutorial].&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I help with translating Moodle documentation?==&lt;br /&gt;
Please see the guide [[Translating Moodle Docs]].&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I find out the context of the strings?==&lt;br /&gt;
You can find where a language string is located as described in the user docs [[:en:Language_customisation#Finding_the_component_and_string_identifier|Finding the component and string identifier]] and [[:en:Language FAQ|Language FAQ]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may wish to use two windows (perhaps using two monitors), with one displaying the page in English and the other displaying the page in your language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:two windows translation.jpg|Two simultaneous windows in two languages|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you think the original English language strings have more than one meaning and you can&#039;t guess which one applies, you are welcome to post in the [https://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=5 AMOS translation forum]. &lt;br /&gt;
==Is there a list of Moodle error messages which can be translated?==&lt;br /&gt;
Error messages are listed in the user docs [[:en:Category:Error|Category:Error]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can the User Tours from Moodle.net be translated?==&lt;br /&gt;
* Yes. See [[Translating User tours from Moodle.net]]&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I test my plugins translations of several (different) Moodle branches?==&lt;br /&gt;
*Linux&lt;br /&gt;
** You can have several Moodle branches in one Ubuntu (or any other Linux distro) machine by following [https://docs.moodle.org/31/en/Step-by-step_Installation_Guide_for_Ubuntu#Hosting_several_Moodle_branches_in_one_Ubuntu_server these steps].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Windows&lt;br /&gt;
** You can have several [https://download.moodle.org/windows/ local Moodle servers] in different folders in a Windows (7,8,10) PC. It is very easy to start one branch server, work on it, stop it and then start a different branch.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Some early local Moodle (versions before 3.0) server packages from [https://download.moodle.org/windows/ https://download.moodle.org/windows/] only work in Windows 7, but apparently not in Windows 8 and definitely not in Windows 10, regardless of compatibility settings. For these you would need to install XAMP separately. Moodle 3.0 and newer branches do work under Windows 10.}}&lt;br /&gt;
*Mac&lt;br /&gt;
**We need to write about this...&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I translate a language pack offline / can I use another language then English as source language?==&lt;br /&gt;
Yes you can, but it is not recommended because there is a high risk of causing problems (remember - sites update language packs automatically, so your problem spreads quickly over the world).&lt;br /&gt;
One problem is that you absolutely have to avoid untranslated strings or strings in the wrong language in the language pack. This should NEVER happen. Another problem is that there is no way to know which strings are already translated. There is also a higher risk for syntax errors. If you have to, you can follow the following procedure:&lt;br /&gt;
* download the English language pack (or another one if you want a different source language)&lt;br /&gt;
* translate directly in the php file, preferably using something with syntax highlighting (Geany, Gedit, Notepad++ on Windows, ...)&lt;br /&gt;
* IMPORTANT: delete all not-translated lines from the file, before uploading - therefore it is probably best to translate line by line and keep the original source files, so you can work with a record of processed line numbers.&lt;br /&gt;
* import the files in the translation portal following the manual on https://docs.moodle.org/dev/AMOS_manual#Importing_a_file (IMPORTANT: zip file cannot contain any folders)&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I translate H5P content types?==&lt;br /&gt;
Use [https://translate-h5p.tk/weblate/projects/h5p/ the Weblate H5P project translation page] or see the h5p.org guide [https://h5p.org/adding-content-type-translation-via-github Adding content type translations via GitHub] and the forum discussion [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=414325 Translate H5P items].&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:en:Language customization|Language customization]] in the user docs for information on how to edit an existing language pack&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=4098#p4879 Generating a translation memory and running a quality test] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=347843 translation in context] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Übersetzung FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Language]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Translation_langconfig&amp;diff=143988</id>
		<title>Translation langconfig</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Translation_langconfig&amp;diff=143988"/>
		<updated>2022-08-05T10:18:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: adding the new parameters that were in dev docs but not in wiki docs.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Translation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Langconfig is an important file in a language pack, dealing with all the configuration parameters of that language. It is good practice to review this first when starting of a new language pack or when taking on responsibility of an existing language pack. You can edit it by going to lang.moodle.org and find it as the core_langconfig component for your language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you find a little documentation for each setting to help you deciding what should go there for your language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===alphabet,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The alphabet in your language. Used e.g. for the list of letters on the participants page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===am,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The way to indicate morning in your language. This is used on servers that only support 24 hour time for your language. (see https://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-74379).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===amcaps,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The way to indicate moring in capitals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===backupnameformat,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===decsep,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How decimals are separated in your language. [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Decimal_separator Usually a dot or a comma]. Take note that some countries which seem to share the same language may have a different character to separate the integer part from the fractional part of a number written in decimal form. e.g. Central American Spanish-speaking countries use the decimal point, while South American Spanish-speaking countries use the decimal comma.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example:&lt;br /&gt;
 * English: 36.5&lt;br /&gt;
 * Dutch: 36,5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===firstdayofweek,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The first day of the week in your language. Allowed values are 0,1,2,3,4,5,6, where 0 stands for Sunday.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===iso6391,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The ISO 639.1 value for your language. You can find this value easily on [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_ISO_639-1_codes Wikipedia].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===iso6392,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The ISO 639.2 value for your language. You can find this value easily on [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_ISO_639-2_codes Wikipedia].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===labelsep,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How a label is separated from a form. Could be a colon, a space and a colon or something different, according to what&#039;s generally used in your language. This character is not read by screen readers for accessibility reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===listsep,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The symbol usually used in your language, for separating items in a list. This is used e.g. when using formulas with multiple items in the gradebook. This must be a symbol different from the decsep symbol.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===locale,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
locale for *nix servers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your Moodle calendar is not translated, then this string is wrong (or your server is not configured to support the language)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Locales, used in language packs should come only from the table of locales at https://docs.moodle.org/dev/Table_of_locales and the list at https://docs.moodle.org/dev/List_of_locales_supported_on_Moodle_community_servers}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An unsupported locale in a Mac or Linux site will produce the following error when you try to update your language pack:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Unsupported locale mac.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And, more important, it may produce an intermitent &#039;undefined&#039; error message:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ERROR undefined.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===localecldr,core_lanconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See http://cldr.unicode.org/index/cldr-spec/picking-the-right-language-code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===localewin,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
locale for Windows servers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your Moodle calendar is not translated, then this string is wrong (or your server is not configured to support the language). There are quite a few languages that are not supported by Windows servers and the localewin server can not be set. In that case, you have to run your Moodle on a *nix server to make the translation of your Moodle calendar work&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===localewincharset,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The character set to use when Moodle is installed on a Windows server&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===oldcharset,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
Necessary to upgrade from prior to 1.6. This string defines the charset used in 1.5 and earlier for this language pack. For language packs that start later then Moodle 1.5, this can be left empty&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===parentlanguage,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The original Moodle default Australian language pack has this field empty (as the Australian English language IS the official Moodle language).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your language pack relies on another one (it is a &#039;child&#039; language of a &#039;parent&#039; language), then this is the place to point out which language pack. &#039;&#039;&#039;For most language packs, this should be left empty&#039;&#039;&#039;, to default to English if strings are missing. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: Canadian French (fr_ca) is mostly the same as French (fr) apart from a few changes. Creating a language pack with as parent language French will shop French if a string does not exist in the language pack Canadian French. If a string doesn&#039;t exist in both language packs, English is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the download page for the language packs (https://download.moodle.org/langpack/3.7/) you can see how many strings are different from the parent language pack. In Moodle 3.7, Canadian French had 998 changes from French.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Using language customization for parentlanguage inside langconfig.php in an existing Moodle server, where you add a parent language (while the AMOS parentlanguage string is actually empty) will ask for the installation of said parent language in the server, but will not substitute the missing translations in the child language with those of the parent language; English will be shown. Surgically editing (a dangerous, never recommended procedure) the langconfig.php file of the server would work, until the next language pack update -manual or cron made-  erases the change.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===pm,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The way to indicate afternoon in your language. This is used on servers that only support 24 hour time for your language. (see https://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-74379).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===pmcaps,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The way to indicate afternoon in capitals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedate,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedatefullshort,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedateshort,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedatetime,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedatetimeshort,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedaydate,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedaydatetime,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedayshort,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and day are displayed in short in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimedaytime,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and day are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimemonthyear,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How month and year are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimerecent,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimerecentfull,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time and date are displayed for recent activities in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
===strftimetime,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How time is displayed in Moodle. Usually it is fine to check the order of the English one and use the same symbols. If that doesn&#039;t serve your needs, the complete reference for what is possible can be found on http://www.w3schools.com/php/func_date_strftime.asp&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===thisdirection,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
In which direction your language should be displayed on the screen. The only possible options are ltr (left to right) or rtl (right to left).&#039;&#039;&#039;Do not attempt to translate these&#039;&#039;&#039;, or [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=328567#p1323101 you will wreak havoc on many themes].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===thisdirectionvertical,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How text that is printed vertical on the screen is oriënted (like in a docked block).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only possible values can be btt (bottom to top) or ttb (top to bottom). &#039;&#039;&#039;Do not attempt to translate these&#039;&#039;&#039;, or [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=328567#p1323101 you will wreak havoc on many themes].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===thislanguage,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The name of your language in your own language&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===thislanguageint,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
The name of your language in English&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===thousandssep,core_langconfig===&lt;br /&gt;
How you separate thousands in your language.&lt;br /&gt;
Important: this can not be a space (more information in discussion http://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=1450#p1730). If you want a space, you can try with &amp;amp;amp;nbsp; but that is not fully tested yet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
 * in Dutch 1.000.000 (with a dot)&lt;br /&gt;
 * in English 1,000,000 (with a comma)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Langconfig]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Translation&amp;diff=143986</id>
		<title>Translation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Translation&amp;diff=143986"/>
		<updated>2022-08-05T10:08:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: /* So you&amp;#039;d like to help with translating Moodle? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Translation}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==So you&#039;d like to help with translating Moodle?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Great! :-) All translation of Moodle LMS  and the plugins happens on our &#039;&#039;&#039;[http://lang.moodle.org Moodle translation site]&#039;&#039;&#039;, so you&#039;ll need to start by creating an account there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps you&#039;ve found some words or phrases not yet translated into your language? Or you&#039;ve spotted a mistake? If so, please see the guide to [[Contributing a translation]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you&#039;d like to help translate more than just a few strings, please contact the maintainer of your language pack as listed in the [http://lang.moodle.org/local/amos/credits.php Translation credits] and ask where you can help.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Did you end up here, wanting to translate the [https://moodle.academy Moodle Academy courses], please start at [[Translating Moodle Academy]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wish to take on responsibility for a language pack?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please see [[Maintaining a language pack]] and the [[AMOS manual]]  for further information about the AMOS translation toolkit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Is Moodle not yet translated into your language?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please see  [[Starting a new language pack]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Any questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please check the [[Translation  FAQ]] and join us in the [http://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=5 Using AMOS forum].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Traduction]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Übersetzung]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Traducción]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Language]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Translating_Moodle_Academy&amp;diff=143985</id>
		<title>Translating Moodle Academy</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Translating_Moodle_Academy&amp;diff=143985"/>
		<updated>2022-08-05T10:07:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: Created page with &amp;quot;{{Translation}}  The translation of the Moodle Academy courses is a different process then the translation of the Moodle interface. While the translation of the Moodle interfa...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Translation}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The translation of the Moodle Academy courses is a different process then the translation of the Moodle interface. While the translation of the Moodle interface is about changing the code, the translation of the Moodle academy is about changing the content of Moodle courses. Therefore, the process is different and it happens on another location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You start by [https://moodle.academy/course/view.php?id=52 following a course about translating Moodle Academy]. When you completed the course, the Moodle Academy managers will review your work and upgrade your rights on the site. This process takes a couple of days. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When your rights are upgraded, you will have an extra icon next to every item in the courses on [https://moodle.academy Moodle Academy], allowing you to translate the content directly into your language. Changes will take effect immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So move on to [https://moodle.academy/course/view.php?id=52 the Moodle Academy translation course] and create valuable documentation for your colleagues and other users of your language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Language]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Template:Translation&amp;diff=143984</id>
		<title>Template:Translation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Template:Translation&amp;diff=143984"/>
		<updated>2022-08-05T10:03:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: adding moodle academy&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;sideblock right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;header&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Translation]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;	&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Contributing a translation]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Maintaining a language pack]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[AMOS manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Starting a new language pack]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translating plugins]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translating Moodle Docs]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translating the Moodle app]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translating Moodle Academy]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translation FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;[[Category:Translation]]&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;This template will categorize articles that include it into [[:Category:Translation]].&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Translation_FAQ&amp;diff=143982</id>
		<title>Translation FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Translation_FAQ&amp;diff=143982"/>
		<updated>2022-08-05T10:00:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Translation}}&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I help with translating Moodle?==&lt;br /&gt;
Please see the guide [[Contributing a translation]].&lt;br /&gt;
==I&#039;ve found an error in a language pack. What do I do?==&lt;br /&gt;
* You are welcome to [[Contributing a translation|contribute a fix]] for the error. Alternatively you can contact the language pack maintainer as listed in the [http://lang.moodle.org/local/amos/credits.php Translation credits].&lt;br /&gt;
* English language string typo fixes and suggested improvements can be [[Improving English language strings|contributed to the English (fixes) (en_fix) language pack]].&lt;br /&gt;
==The month names and days are displayed in English. How can I translate them?==&lt;br /&gt;
This is neither Moodle bug nor a missing translation. Names of days and months are pulled out of your operating system. Your server, where the Moodle is running, does not seem to have the specific [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Locale_(computer_software) locale] installed. You need to contact the server administrator and ask them to install the needed locale. See [[Table of locales]] for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The particular locale to use for the given language is configured in the langconfig.php file in strings &#039;&#039;locale&#039;&#039; (for Unix like operating systems) and &#039;&#039;localewin&#039;&#039; (for Windows operating systems).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On Ubuntu/Debian, the package &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;locale-all&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; can be installed to support all existing languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mac OS is known to have a very limited support for locales. This can not be fixed.&lt;br /&gt;
==Why are log descriptions displayed in English?==&lt;br /&gt;
In log reports, descriptions are intended to be displayed in English only; it is not possible to translate them. For example &amp;quot;The user with id &#039;2&#039; viewed the course with id &#039;4&#039;.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
==I&#039;m starting a new language pack or I&#039;m contributing to one. Can I do the user interface strings first?==&lt;br /&gt;
No, there is no way to know which strings will be shown for users and which not. But to help you a little bit, there are some unofficial priorities you can take into account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First:&lt;br /&gt;
* make sure [[Translation_langconfig|langconfig]] is properly set up.&lt;br /&gt;
* take a look at [[Translation priority]]. All files have a rating according to how urgent they need translating.&lt;br /&gt;
* less urgent are also the contributed plugins, since they are not part of a standard Moodle distribution. There is a list of [https://moodle.org/plugins/stats.php the 20 top plugins downloads for Moodle] which might be worth considering for translation priority.&lt;br /&gt;
==How many words are there in the English language pack?==&lt;br /&gt;
See the discussion [http://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=3651 How many words are there in the English language pack?].&lt;br /&gt;
==Moodle languages with several available language packs==&lt;br /&gt;
===Are there translations for the American (and other branches of the) English language?===&lt;br /&gt;
The [http://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=2617 &amp;quot;official&amp;quot;] language for Moodle is actually Australian English (&#039;&#039;G&#039;day mate!&#039;&#039;) , which is almost 100% the same as UK English. [http://english.stackexchange.com/questions/74737/what-is-the-origin-of-the-phrase-two-nations-divided-by-a-common-language Someone] once said &amp;quot;America and England are two nations divided by a common language&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* The English - United States (en_us)] language pack mostly contains different spellings (color &#039;&#039;versus&#039;&#039; colour, enroll &#039;&#039;versus&#039;&#039; enrol etc).&lt;br /&gt;
* The English - Pirate (en_ar)] language pack is used in the &#039;[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=132888 Talk Like a Pirate]&#039; day.&lt;br /&gt;
* The English - United States K12 (en_us_k12) language pack is used in the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/K%E2%80%9312 K-12] (kindergarten to grade 12) primary and secondary education in the USA, Canada, and other English speaking countries. It includes spellings from the en_us language pack and the term &amp;quot;course&amp;quot; is renamed as &amp;quot;class&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* The English for kids (en_kids) language pack seems to be a simplified version of the most common English strings seen by Moodle users, considered easier/suitable for small children.&lt;br /&gt;
* The English (fixes) (en_fix) language pack is used to suggest Moodle core language strings improvements and typo fixes, as described in the guide [[Improving English language strings]].&lt;br /&gt;
===Why does Moodle have four different language packs for the German language?===&lt;br /&gt;
* In Germany we have a formal language where people are talking with „Sie“ to each other. This is the language of the formal adults. I think it’s something like using „Sir“ in english language. The normal German language pack is using this formal language. Nearly all strings in the Moodle language pack and in the translated plugins are translated in the formal language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You can’t use these formal words in school … there you are using an informal language with „du“. Students are talking to each other like friends. Therefor we made the language pack „German personal“ (de_du). It come with the personal words „du“, „dein“, „dir“ and so on where the formal words are „Sie“, „Ihre“, „Ihnen“ (yes, these words are written with an uppercase letter).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* For my (Ralf Krause) personal use I take „German personal&amp;quot; (de_du) or „German Kids“ (de_kids). „German Kids“ uses the personal words „du“, „dein“ and „dir“ but it also uses an easier to understand language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Some time ago we tried to make Moodle as a platform for social communication but nobody wanted to use it. Therefore we made &amp;quot;German community“. In a social platform, nobody would talk about teachers or students or participants or classrooms or courses … in a social platform, you would use members of a group and meetings. I don’t know if this pack will be used in future.&lt;br /&gt;
===Why does Moodle have several different language packs for the Spanish language?===&lt;br /&gt;
* Spain and many South American countries use a (comma) [[Decimal separator]] that is different from the (decimal point) used in Mexico and Central America.&lt;br /&gt;
** Moodle core in English uses by default a decimal point for calculations, and Moodle Docs do too.&lt;br /&gt;
** This caused many problems in the [[Gradebook]] calculations and with the [https://docs.moodle.org/all/es/P%C3%A1gina_Principal Spanish Moodle Docs].&lt;br /&gt;
* Just as &amp;quot;America and England are two nations divided by a common language&amp;quot;, so are Spain and Mexico. See [https://docs.moodle.org/all/es/Espa%C3%B1ol_de_M%C3%A9xico the Mexican Spanish documentation page] in Spanish.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Venezuelan Spanish (es_ve) is a very small child language of the international Spanish language.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Colombian Spanish (es_co) is a very small child language of the international Spanish language.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Mexican Spanish (es_mx) is a very modern, comprehensive, independent, language pack, specially made for Mexican Moodlers.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Mexican Spanish for kids (es_mx_kids) is a simplified version of the most common Mexican Spanish strings seen by Moodle users, considered easier/suitable for small children.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can read about [https://docs.moodle.org/all/es/Espa%C3%B1ol_internacional#Idiomas_hijos_que_depend.C3.ADan_del_Espa.C3.B1ol_internacional two (now defunct) other Spanish child languages].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why do other languages have child languages?===&lt;br /&gt;
* Languages with &#039;&#039;-kids&#039;&#039; in their code names are all child languages with a simplified version of common language strings aimed at small children. &lt;br /&gt;
* If you have the time, it is probably a good idea to have one such child language for kids for your main language pack. &lt;br /&gt;
* Current (mid 2022) languages for kids are:&lt;br /&gt;
** Deutsch (kids) &lt;br /&gt;
** English (kids)&lt;br /&gt;
** Español de México para niños (Mexican Spanish for kids)&lt;br /&gt;
** Ελληνικά για παιδιά (Greek for kids)&lt;br /&gt;
** עברית בתי־ספר (Hebrew for kids)&lt;br /&gt;
** हिंदी (Hindi for kids)&lt;br /&gt;
** Japanese (kids)&lt;br /&gt;
** Deutsch - Kids&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Norwegian (Primary) language pack is aimed at primary education.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Finnish for companies is aimed at companies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Languages ending in &amp;quot;_wp&amp;quot; are supplementary languages for [https://docs.moodle.org/37/en/Moodle_Workplace Moodle Workplace]. They are maintained by the companies offering [https://docs.moodle.org/37/en/Moodle_Workplace Moodle Workplace].&lt;br /&gt;
==Are there items which are NOT to be translated?==&lt;br /&gt;
===Moodle variables enclosed within {curly brackets}===&lt;br /&gt;
The following words, when enclosed within {curly brackets}, are placeholders for Moodle names of variables. They should not be translated, but must remain as they are within the curly brackets:&lt;br /&gt;
 firstname, lastname, username, email, city, country, lang, timezone, mailformat, maildisplay, maildigest, htmleditor, ajax, autosubscribe , institution, department, idnumber, skype , msn, aim, yahoo, icq, phone1, phone2, address, url, description, descriptionformat, password, auth, oldusername , deleted, suspended, course1, course2, course3, course4&lt;br /&gt;
They must also be written exactly like this in all translations of the documentation pages (such as this page.) However, the translator might like to include a translation enclosed in brackets. For example, in the Spanish documentation pages you might find: password (&#039;&#039;contraseña&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fact is: &#039;&#039;&#039;no placeholders can be translated in AMOS&#039;&#039;&#039;. There is no official list of &amp;quot;reserved&amp;quot; $a properties. Whatever xyz is put in {$a-&amp;gt;xyz}, it must be kept as it is in AMOS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: 26 AMOS fullnamedisplay_core original.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Must&#039;&#039;&#039; be (in this case, when translated into Mexican Spanish):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:26 AMOS fullnamedisplay_core.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
unless your language uses lastname before the firstname, as Japanese does, which translates to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:26 AMOS fullnamedisplay_core Japanese.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Placeholders enclosed within % characters (%example%) must not be translated===&lt;br /&gt;
The [https://moodle.org/plugins/local_moodlecloudsignup Moodle Cloud Signup and Portal strings] local plugin is used for accessing the [https://moodle.com/cloud/ MoodleCloud] and it includes several strings that have some words surrounded by % characters (eg, %date%). These words must not be translated, they must be copied exactly into the language pack translation, but the rest of the string might or might not be translated.&lt;br /&gt;
* Example of one string that can not be translated and must be copied exactly:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AMOS placeholders with percentace character.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Example of one string with one placeholder (highlighted) and some regular text that can be easily translated:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AMOS text with placeholders with percentace character.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
===Placeholders in H5P prefixed with % or : characters must not be translated===&lt;br /&gt;
The [http://h5p.org/ H5P editor] integrated with Moodle since 3.9 has some variables prefixed with &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;:&amp;quot; that must not be translated because they are transformed internally with the correct value. They should be treated as the Moodle curly brackets variables.&lt;br /&gt;
* Example of variables with &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; that can not be translated and must be copied exactly:&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;Parameters contain %used while only %supported or earlier are supported.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
  In that case, %used and %supported must not be translated. So, for instance, the Spanish translation would be something like:&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;Parámetros contiene %used mientras que sólo se soportan %supported o anterior.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* Example of variables with &amp;quot;:&amp;quot; that can not be translated and must be copied exactly:&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;The :property value exceeds the maximum of :max.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
  In that case, :property and :max must not be translated. The Spanish translation for this string would be something like:&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;El valor de :property excede el máximo de :max.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
=== All fieldnames must be kept in English===&lt;br /&gt;
* These names are hooks that are used in the software. You should not translate them.&lt;br /&gt;
* See the example below for the string uploadcourses_help in the file tool_uploadcourse for Moodle 3.1:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fieldnames are not to be translatd.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Notice that the string text indicates (red rectangle) that these words (enclosed in green rectangles) are fieldnames. Also notice that the Spanish translation clearly indicates, at the final part of the paragraph &#039;&#039;(así escritos, en inglés)&#039;&#039; that these fieldnames must be written in English as they are written here.&lt;br /&gt;
* Some used fieldnames in Moodle are:&lt;br /&gt;
 category, category_id, category_idnumber, category_path, context, course, description, descriptionformat, email, enrolmentkey, firstname, fullname, groupname, hidepicture, idnumber, intro, lastname, maxgrade, maxrequest, name, password, picture, section, shortname, teachers, timeopen, timeclose, timeend, timestart, username, visible, &lt;br /&gt;
* Examples of strings where these fielnames appear are uploadcohorts_help | core_cohort, importgroups_help | core_group, uploadcourses_help | tool_uploadcourse and uploadusers_help | tool_uploaduser.&lt;br /&gt;
* Note that these fieldnames may appear as real fieldnames (must not be translated) or as regular words in another context (can and must be translated). You should exercise caution and, If possible, always check that Moodle works correctly by testing your translations with some data in a real or test server.&lt;br /&gt;
===Local addresses after &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;../===&lt;br /&gt;
Addresses inside a Language string that have &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;../ reference a specific URL inside your Moodle server and you must keep the address part of the expression, but you can translate the descriptive name part. See the following example:&lt;br /&gt;
 noassignableroles | tool_cohortautoroles&lt;br /&gt;
 There are currently no roles that can be assigned in the user context. &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;../../roles/manage.php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Manage roles&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* You must keep the &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;../../roles/manage.php&amp;quot;&amp;gt; part, as this references to the [https://docs.moodle.org/31/en/PHP PHP] code in your Moodle server that will be executed in order to manage roles&lt;br /&gt;
* You can/should/must translate &#039;Manage roles&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not forget to keep the ending &amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Moodle Docs addresses after &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;http://docs.moodle.org/en/&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;===&lt;br /&gt;
Addresses inside a Language string that have &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;http://docs.moodle.org/en/ &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;reference a specific URL in the Moodle English Documentation. You must look at that address and &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; if your language has a valid translation for that page, you can/should replace the original English Docs address with your own language address. See the following example:&lt;br /&gt;
 core backup | nonisowarning&lt;br /&gt;
 Warning: this backup is from a non-Unicode version of Moodle (pre 1.6). If this backup contains any non-ISO-8859-1 texts then they may be CORRUPTED if you try to restore them to this Unicode version of Moodle. See the &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;http://docs.moodle.org/en/Backup_FAQ&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Backup FAQ&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt; for more information about how to recover this backup correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
* There are six different language translations for that page. So, you can only replace this address if your language is one of these.&lt;br /&gt;
===Other internet addresses after &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;http://===&lt;br /&gt;
* You must proceed as with Moodle Docs addresses:&lt;br /&gt;
* Example:&lt;br /&gt;
 auth_radius | auth_radiusdescription&lt;br /&gt;
 This method uses a &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/RADIUS&amp;quot;&amp;gt;RADIUS&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt; server to check whether a given username and password is valid.&lt;br /&gt;
* You must check the (English language wikipedia) page about the RADIUS server, and then you can decide whether to keep this address or replace it with your own language matching wikipedia translation.&lt;br /&gt;
===HTML codes that must not be translated===&lt;br /&gt;
The following HTML codes are reserved words that must not be translated. However, it is important for the translators to understand their meaning in order to decide whether to keep them in the translation and if so, whether they can be rearranged.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - non-breaking space i.e. a space but there will never be a line-break inserted instead of this space at the end of a line.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;ensp&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;emsp&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - denote an en space and an em space respectively, where an en space is half the point size and an em space is equal to the point size of the current font. For fixed pitch fonts, the user agent can treat the en space as being equivalent to a single space character, and the em space as being equuivalent to two space characters. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;amp&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - ampersand sign (&amp;amp;)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;apos&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - apostrophe sign (&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;copy&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - copyright sign (©)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;plusmn&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - &amp;quot;plus or minus&amp;quot; sign (±)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;times&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - multiply sign (*)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;divide&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - divide sign (/)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - &amp;quot;greater than&amp;quot; sign ( &amp;gt; )&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - &amp;quot;less than&amp;quot; sign (&amp;lt;) &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;laquo&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - quotation mark (‘)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lsquo&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - left single quotation sign (‘)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;rsquo&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - right single quotation sign (’)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;ouml&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - small letter o with diaeresis (ö)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;mdash&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash#Em_dash em dash] sign (—)&lt;br /&gt;
===Calculation functions must not be translated===&lt;br /&gt;
[https://docs.moodle.org/32/en/Grade_calculations#Calculation_functions Calculation functions] start with an equal sign (=). Following is an expression using operators and functions supported by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DO NOT translate calculation functions.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
===The &#039;thisdirection&#039; and &#039;thisdirectionvertical&#039; strings in core_langconfig should never be translated===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The &#039;thisdirection&#039; and &#039;thisdirectionvertical&#039; strings in core_langconfig should never be translated, as they are not variables meant to be translated. They are prefixing selectors used by the themes to display left-to-right or right-to-left languages. Read [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=328567#p1323101 more about problems with these variables].&lt;br /&gt;
===MoodleBox===&lt;br /&gt;
The word &#039;MoodleBox&#039; must be kept in all languages.&lt;br /&gt;
===Safe Exam Browser===&lt;br /&gt;
A feedback by the Safe Exam Browser main developer:&lt;br /&gt;
 The software is called “Safe Exam Browser” in any language, we don’t translate the name of the application. So it doesn’t make sense to translate it in any plugin, you could use it as a subtitle or in brackets, like “Safe Exam Browser (Navegador de Examen Seguro)”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Is there a way to check the integrity of all placeholders in a language pack?==&lt;br /&gt;
* Not a at the moment. See MDL-51775 .&lt;br /&gt;
* You can use [https://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=4661 this trick] to check for integrity:&lt;br /&gt;
** Load the language pack in a [https://download.moodle.org/windows/ local instance of Moodle].&lt;br /&gt;
**   In order to generate a [https://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=4098 translation memory], load the language pack in the [https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/Language_customisation Language customization] tool, so that the texts are loaded in the database.&lt;br /&gt;
**    Run the sql instance in the file (tm_generator.txt)&lt;br /&gt;
**    Insert the result of the query in template.tmx file&lt;br /&gt;
** The result is a translation memory that can be analysed with [http://www.opentag.com/okapi/wiki/index.php?title=CheckMate Checkmate].&lt;br /&gt;
** The problem: probably you will get many errors due to some characters that are not allowed by Checkmate so you will have to remove manually some translation units. After doing it, you will get a report with some possible errors (see the attached image).&lt;br /&gt;
** Of course, it would be great to have an integrated quality check system in Moodle. Vote for MDL-51775 .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The contents of the file tm_generator.txt are (&#039;&#039;&#039;change the language from eu to your language&#039;&#039;&#039;):&lt;br /&gt;
 SELECT concat(&#039;&amp;lt;tu tuid=&amp;quot;&#039;,mdl_tool_customlang_components.name,&#039;|&#039;,mdl_tool_customlang.stringid,&#039;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;tuv xml:lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;seg&amp;gt;&#039;,mdl_tool_customlang.original,&#039;&amp;lt;/seg&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tuv&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;tuv xml:lang=&amp;quot;&#039;,mdl_tool_customlang.lang,&#039;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;seg&amp;gt;&#039;,mdl_tool_customlang.master,&#039;&amp;lt;/seg&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tuv&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/tu&amp;gt;&#039;) as txt&lt;br /&gt;
 FROM mdl_tool_customlang INNER JOIN mdl_tool_customlang_components ON mdl_tool_customlang.componentid =  mdl_tool_customlang_components.id&lt;br /&gt;
 WHERE (((mdl_tool_customlang.lang)=&amp;quot;eu&amp;quot;) AND ((mdl_tool_customlang.original) Is Not Null) AND ((mdl_tool_customlang.master)  &amp;lt;&amp;gt;mdl_tool_customlang.original));&lt;br /&gt;
* the contents of the template.tmx file are:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;?xml version=&amp;quot;1.0&amp;quot; encoding=&amp;quot;UTF-8&amp;quot;?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tmx version=&amp;quot;1.4&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;header creationtool=&amp;quot;SQLQuery&amp;quot; creationtoolversion=&amp;quot;unknown&amp;quot; segtype=&amp;quot;paragraph&amp;quot; o-tmf=&amp;quot;unknown&amp;quot; adminlang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; srclang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; datatype=&amp;quot;unknown&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/header&amp;gt;&amp;lt;body&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 PLACE HERE THE RESULT OF THE SQL QUERY&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/body&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/tmx&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==What is a &#039;&#039;translation memory&#039;&#039; and how can I create a translation memory out of a Moodle language pack?==&lt;br /&gt;
* Read the &#039;Is there a way to check the integrity of all placeholders in a language pack?&#039; section above.&lt;br /&gt;
* See [https://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/user.php?id=1489&amp;amp;page=1 this post] and [https://dl.dropboxusercontent.com/u/86242384/moodle/en/publish/moodle_tm/website_index.html this tutorial].&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I help with translating Moodle documentation?==&lt;br /&gt;
Please see the guide [[Translating Moodle Docs]].&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I find out the context of the strings?==&lt;br /&gt;
You can find where a language string is located as described in the user docs [[:en:Language_customisation#Finding_the_component_and_string_identifier|Finding the component and string identifier]] and [[:en:Language FAQ|Language FAQ]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may wish to use two windows (perhaps using two monitors), with one displaying the page in English and the other displaying the page in your language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:two windows translation.jpg|Two simultaneous windows in two languages|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you think the original English language strings have more than one meaning and you can&#039;t guess which one applies, you are welcome to post in the [https://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=5 AMOS translation forum]. &lt;br /&gt;
==Is there a list of Moodle error messages which can be translated?==&lt;br /&gt;
Error messages are listed in the user docs [[:en:Category:Error|Category:Error]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can the subtitles for Moodle HQ YouTube videos be translated?==&lt;br /&gt;
You can contribute translations for Moodle videos used in [[https://moodle.academy/|Moodle Academy]] courses. Enrol in &#039;Translate Moodle Academy&#039; course in https://moodle.academy/enrol/index.php?id=52&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can the User Tours from Moodle.net be translated?==&lt;br /&gt;
* Yes. See [[Translating User tours from Moodle.net]]&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I test my plugins translations of several (different) Moodle branches?==&lt;br /&gt;
*Linux&lt;br /&gt;
** You can have several Moodle branches in one Ubuntu (or any other Linux distro) machine by following [https://docs.moodle.org/31/en/Step-by-step_Installation_Guide_for_Ubuntu#Hosting_several_Moodle_branches_in_one_Ubuntu_server these steps].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Windows&lt;br /&gt;
** You can have several [https://download.moodle.org/windows/ local Moodle servers] in different folders in a Windows (7,8,10) PC. It is very easy to start one branch server, work on it, stop it and then start a different branch.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Some early local Moodle (versions before 3.0) server packages from [https://download.moodle.org/windows/ https://download.moodle.org/windows/] only work in Windows 7, but apparently not in Windows 8 and definitely not in Windows 10, regardless of compatibility settings. For these you would need to install XAMP separately. Moodle 3.0 and newer branches do work under Windows 10.}}&lt;br /&gt;
*Mac&lt;br /&gt;
**We need to write about this...&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I translate a language pack offline / can I use another language then English as source language?==&lt;br /&gt;
Yes you can, but it is not recommended because there is a high risk of causing problems (remember - sites update language packs automatically, so your problem spreads quickly over the world).&lt;br /&gt;
One problem is that you absolutely have to avoid untranslated strings or strings in the wrong language in the language pack. This should NEVER happen. Another problem is that there is no way to know which strings are already translated. There is also a higher risk for syntax errors. If you have to, you can follow the following procedure:&lt;br /&gt;
* download the English language pack (or another one if you want a different source language)&lt;br /&gt;
* translate directly in the php file, preferably using something with syntax highlighting (Geany, Gedit, Notepad++ on Windows, ...)&lt;br /&gt;
* IMPORTANT: delete all not-translated lines from the file, before uploading - therefore it is probably best to translate line by line and keep the original source files, so you can work with a record of processed line numbers.&lt;br /&gt;
* import the files in the translation portal following the manual on https://docs.moodle.org/dev/AMOS_manual#Importing_a_file (IMPORTANT: zip file cannot contain any folders)&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I translate H5P content types?==&lt;br /&gt;
Use [https://translate-h5p.tk/weblate/projects/h5p/ the Weblate H5P project translation page] or see the h5p.org guide [https://h5p.org/adding-content-type-translation-via-github Adding content type translations via GitHub] and the forum discussion [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=414325 Translate H5P items].&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:en:Language customization|Language customization]] in the user docs for information on how to edit an existing language pack&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=4098#p4879 Generating a translation memory and running a quality test] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=347843 translation in context] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Übersetzung FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Language]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Translation&amp;diff=143981</id>
		<title>Translation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Translation&amp;diff=143981"/>
		<updated>2022-08-05T09:59:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: Sorry, it&amp;#039;s the other way round&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Translation}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==So you&#039;d like to help with translating Moodle?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Great! :-) All translation of Moodle LMS  and the plugins happens on our &#039;&#039;&#039;[http://lang.moodle.org Moodle translation site]&#039;&#039;&#039;, so you&#039;ll need to start by creating an account there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps you&#039;ve found some words or phrases not yet translated into your language? Or you&#039;ve spotted a mistake? If so, please see the guide to [[Contributing a translation]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you&#039;d like to help translate more than just a few strings, please contact the maintainer of your language pack as listed in the [http://lang.moodle.org/local/amos/credits.php Translation credits] and ask where you can help.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Did you end up here, wanting to translate the [https://moodle.academy Moodle Academy courses], please start at [[Translation Moodle Academy]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wish to take on responsibility for a language pack?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please see [[Maintaining a language pack]] and the [[AMOS manual]]  for further information about the AMOS translation toolkit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Is Moodle not yet translated into your language?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please see  [[Starting a new language pack]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Any questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please check the [[Translation  FAQ]] and join us in the [http://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=5 Using AMOS forum].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Traduction]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Übersetzung]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Traducción]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Language]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Translation&amp;diff=143980</id>
		<title>Translation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Translation&amp;diff=143980"/>
		<updated>2022-08-05T09:57:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: reverting my template change - needs further disussion. Added category link in stead.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==So you&#039;d like to help with translating Moodle?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Great! :-) All translation of Moodle LMS  and the plugins happens on our &#039;&#039;&#039;[http://lang.moodle.org Moodle translation site]&#039;&#039;&#039;, so you&#039;ll need to start by creating an account there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps you&#039;ve found some words or phrases not yet translated into your language? Or you&#039;ve spotted a mistake? If so, please see the guide to [[Contributing a translation]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you&#039;d like to help translate more than just a few strings, please contact the maintainer of your language pack as listed in the [http://lang.moodle.org/local/amos/credits.php Translation credits] and ask where you can help.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Did you end up here, wanting to translate the [https://moodle.academy Moodle Academy courses], please start at [[Translation Moodle Academy]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wish to take on responsibility for a language pack?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please see [[Maintaining a language pack]] and the [[AMOS manual]]  for further information about the AMOS translation toolkit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Is Moodle not yet translated into your language?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please see  [[Starting a new language pack]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Any questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please check the [[Translation  FAQ]] and join us in the [http://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=5 Using AMOS forum].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Traduction]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Übersetzung]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Traducción]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Translation]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Translation&amp;diff=143977</id>
		<title>Translation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Translation&amp;diff=143977"/>
		<updated>2022-08-05T09:42:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: adding translation category&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Translation}}&lt;br /&gt;
==So you&#039;d like to help with translating Moodle?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Great! :-) All translation of Moodle LMS  and the plugins happens on our &#039;&#039;&#039;[http://lang.moodle.org Moodle translation site]&#039;&#039;&#039;, so you&#039;ll need to start by creating an account there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps you&#039;ve found some words or phrases not yet translated into your language? Or you&#039;ve spotted a mistake? If so, please see the guide to [[Contributing a translation]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you&#039;d like to help translate more than just a few strings, please contact the maintainer of your language pack as listed in the [http://lang.moodle.org/local/amos/credits.php Translation credits] and ask where you can help.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Did you end up here, wanting to translate the [https://moodle.academy Moodle Academy courses], please start at [[Translation Moodle Academy]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wish to take on responsibility for a language pack?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please see [[Maintaining a language pack]] and the [[AMOS manual]]  for further information about the AMOS translation toolkit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Is Moodle not yet translated into your language?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please see  [[Starting a new language pack]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Any questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please check the [[Translation  FAQ]] and join us in the [http://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=5 Using AMOS forum].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Traduction]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Übersetzung]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Traducción]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Translation_FAQ&amp;diff=143976</id>
		<title>Translation FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Translation_FAQ&amp;diff=143976"/>
		<updated>2022-08-05T09:41:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: adding translation category&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Translation}}&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I help with translating Moodle?==&lt;br /&gt;
Please see the guide [[Contributing a translation]].&lt;br /&gt;
==I&#039;ve found an error in a language pack. What do I do?==&lt;br /&gt;
* You are welcome to [[Contributing a translation|contribute a fix]] for the error. Alternatively you can contact the language pack maintainer as listed in the [http://lang.moodle.org/local/amos/credits.php Translation credits].&lt;br /&gt;
* English language string typo fixes and suggested improvements can be [[Improving English language strings|contributed to the English (fixes) (en_fix) language pack]].&lt;br /&gt;
==The month names and days are displayed in English. How can I translate them?==&lt;br /&gt;
This is neither Moodle bug nor a missing translation. Names of days and months are pulled out of your operating system. Your server, where the Moodle is running, does not seem to have the specific [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Locale_(computer_software) locale] installed. You need to contact the server administrator and ask them to install the needed locale. See [[Table of locales]] for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The particular locale to use for the given language is configured in the langconfig.php file in strings &#039;&#039;locale&#039;&#039; (for Unix like operating systems) and &#039;&#039;localewin&#039;&#039; (for Windows operating systems).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On Ubuntu/Debian, the package &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;locale-all&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; can be installed to support all existing languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mac OS is known to have a very limited support for locales. This can not be fixed.&lt;br /&gt;
==Why are log descriptions displayed in English?==&lt;br /&gt;
In log reports, descriptions are intended to be displayed in English only; it is not possible to translate them. For example &amp;quot;The user with id &#039;2&#039; viewed the course with id &#039;4&#039;.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
==I&#039;m starting a new language pack or I&#039;m contributing to one. Can I do the user interface strings first?==&lt;br /&gt;
No, there is no way to know which strings will be shown for users and which not. But to help you a little bit, there are some unofficial priorities you can take into account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First:&lt;br /&gt;
* make sure [[Translation_langconfig|langconfig]] is properly set up.&lt;br /&gt;
* take a look at [[Translation priority]]. All files have a rating according to how urgent they need translating.&lt;br /&gt;
* less urgent are also the contributed plugins, since they are not part of a standard Moodle distribution. There is a list of [https://moodle.org/plugins/stats.php the 20 top plugins downloads for Moodle] which might be worth considering for translation priority.&lt;br /&gt;
==How many words are there in the English language pack?==&lt;br /&gt;
See the discussion [http://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=3651 How many words are there in the English language pack?].&lt;br /&gt;
==Moodle languages with several available language packs==&lt;br /&gt;
===Are there translations for the American (and other branches of the) English language?===&lt;br /&gt;
The [http://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=2617 &amp;quot;official&amp;quot;] language for Moodle is actually Australian English (&#039;&#039;G&#039;day mate!&#039;&#039;) , which is almost 100% the same as UK English. [http://english.stackexchange.com/questions/74737/what-is-the-origin-of-the-phrase-two-nations-divided-by-a-common-language Someone] once said &amp;quot;America and England are two nations divided by a common language&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* The English - United States (en_us)] language pack mostly contains different spellings (color &#039;&#039;versus&#039;&#039; colour, enroll &#039;&#039;versus&#039;&#039; enrol etc).&lt;br /&gt;
* The English - Pirate (en_ar)] language pack is used in the &#039;[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=132888 Talk Like a Pirate]&#039; day.&lt;br /&gt;
* The English - United States K12 (en_us_k12) language pack is used in the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/K%E2%80%9312 K-12] (kindergarten to grade 12) primary and secondary education in the USA, Canada, and other English speaking countries. It includes spellings from the en_us language pack and the term &amp;quot;course&amp;quot; is renamed as &amp;quot;class&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* The English for kids (en_kids) language pack seems to be a simplified version of the most common English strings seen by Moodle users, considered easier/suitable for small children.&lt;br /&gt;
* The English (fixes) (en_fix) language pack is used to suggest Moodle core language strings improvements and typo fixes, as described in the guide [[Improving English language strings]].&lt;br /&gt;
===Why does Moodle have four different language packs for the German language?===&lt;br /&gt;
* In Germany we have a formal language where people are talking with „Sie“ to each other. This is the language of the formal adults. I think it’s something like using „Sir“ in english language. The normal German language pack is using this formal language. Nearly all strings in the Moodle language pack and in the translated plugins are translated in the formal language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You can’t use these formal words in school … there you are using an informal language with „du“. Students are talking to each other like friends. Therefor we made the language pack „German personal“ (de_du). It come with the personal words „du“, „dein“, „dir“ and so on where the formal words are „Sie“, „Ihre“, „Ihnen“ (yes, these words are written with an uppercase letter).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* For my (Ralf Krause) personal use I take „German personal&amp;quot; (de_du) or „German Kids“ (de_kids). „German Kids“ uses the personal words „du“, „dein“ and „dir“ but it also uses an easier to understand language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Some time ago we tried to make Moodle as a platform for social communication but nobody wanted to use it. Therefore we made &amp;quot;German community“. In a social platform, nobody would talk about teachers or students or participants or classrooms or courses … in a social platform, you would use members of a group and meetings. I don’t know if this pack will be used in future.&lt;br /&gt;
===Why does Moodle have several different language packs for the Spanish language?===&lt;br /&gt;
* Spain and many South American countries use a (comma) [[Decimal separator]] that is different from the (decimal point) used in Mexico and Central America.&lt;br /&gt;
** Moodle core in English uses by default a decimal point for calculations, and Moodle Docs do too.&lt;br /&gt;
** This caused many problems in the [[Gradebook]] calculations and with the [https://docs.moodle.org/all/es/P%C3%A1gina_Principal Spanish Moodle Docs].&lt;br /&gt;
* Just as &amp;quot;America and England are two nations divided by a common language&amp;quot;, so are Spain and Mexico. See [https://docs.moodle.org/all/es/Espa%C3%B1ol_de_M%C3%A9xico the Mexican Spanish documentation page] in Spanish.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Venezuelan Spanish (es_ve) is a very small child language of the international Spanish language.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Colombian Spanish (es_co) is a very small child language of the international Spanish language.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Mexican Spanish (es_mx) is a very modern, comprehensive, independent, language pack, specially made for Mexican Moodlers.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Mexican Spanish for kids (es_mx_kids) is a simplified version of the most common Mexican Spanish strings seen by Moodle users, considered easier/suitable for small children.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can read about [https://docs.moodle.org/all/es/Espa%C3%B1ol_internacional#Idiomas_hijos_que_depend.C3.ADan_del_Espa.C3.B1ol_internacional two (now defunct) other Spanish child languages].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why do other languages have child languages?===&lt;br /&gt;
* Languages with &#039;&#039;-kids&#039;&#039; in their code names are all child languages with a simplified version of common language strings aimed at small children. &lt;br /&gt;
* If you have the time, it is probably a good idea to have one such child language for kids for your main language pack. &lt;br /&gt;
* Current (mid 2022) languages for kids are:&lt;br /&gt;
** Deutsch (kids) &lt;br /&gt;
** English (kids)&lt;br /&gt;
** Español de México para niños (Mexican Spanish for kids)&lt;br /&gt;
** Ελληνικά για παιδιά (Greek for kids)&lt;br /&gt;
** עברית בתי־ספר (Hebrew for kids)&lt;br /&gt;
** हिंदी (Hindi for kids)&lt;br /&gt;
** Japanese (kids)&lt;br /&gt;
** Deutsch - Kids&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Norwegian (Primary) language pack is aimed at primary education.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Finnish for companies is aimed at companies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Languages ending in &amp;quot;_wp&amp;quot; are supplementary languages for [https://docs.moodle.org/37/en/Moodle_Workplace Moodle Workplace]. They are maintained by the companies offering [https://docs.moodle.org/37/en/Moodle_Workplace Moodle Workplace].&lt;br /&gt;
==Are there items which are NOT to be translated?==&lt;br /&gt;
===Moodle variables enclosed within {curly brackets}===&lt;br /&gt;
The following words, when enclosed within {curly brackets}, are placeholders for Moodle names of variables. They should not be translated, but must remain as they are within the curly brackets:&lt;br /&gt;
 firstname, lastname, username, email, city, country, lang, timezone, mailformat, maildisplay, maildigest, htmleditor, ajax, autosubscribe , institution, department, idnumber, skype , msn, aim, yahoo, icq, phone1, phone2, address, url, description, descriptionformat, password, auth, oldusername , deleted, suspended, course1, course2, course3, course4&lt;br /&gt;
They must also be written exactly like this in all translations of the documentation pages (such as this page.) However, the translator might like to include a translation enclosed in brackets. For example, in the Spanish documentation pages you might find: password (&#039;&#039;contraseña&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fact is: &#039;&#039;&#039;no placeholders can be translated in AMOS&#039;&#039;&#039;. There is no official list of &amp;quot;reserved&amp;quot; $a properties. Whatever xyz is put in {$a-&amp;gt;xyz}, it must be kept as it is in AMOS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: 26 AMOS fullnamedisplay_core original.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Must&#039;&#039;&#039; be (in this case, when translated into Mexican Spanish):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:26 AMOS fullnamedisplay_core.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
unless your language uses lastname before the firstname, as Japanese does, which translates to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:26 AMOS fullnamedisplay_core Japanese.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Placeholders enclosed within % characters (%example%) must not be translated===&lt;br /&gt;
The [https://moodle.org/plugins/local_moodlecloudsignup Moodle Cloud Signup and Portal strings] local plugin is used for accessing the [https://moodle.com/cloud/ MoodleCloud] and it includes several strings that have some words surrounded by % characters (eg, %date%). These words must not be translated, they must be copied exactly into the language pack translation, but the rest of the string might or might not be translated.&lt;br /&gt;
* Example of one string that can not be translated and must be copied exactly:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AMOS placeholders with percentace character.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Example of one string with one placeholder (highlighted) and some regular text that can be easily translated:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AMOS text with placeholders with percentace character.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
===Placeholders in H5P prefixed with % or : characters must not be translated===&lt;br /&gt;
The [http://h5p.org/ H5P editor] integrated with Moodle since 3.9 has some variables prefixed with &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;:&amp;quot; that must not be translated because they are transformed internally with the correct value. They should be treated as the Moodle curly brackets variables.&lt;br /&gt;
* Example of variables with &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; that can not be translated and must be copied exactly:&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;Parameters contain %used while only %supported or earlier are supported.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
  In that case, %used and %supported must not be translated. So, for instance, the Spanish translation would be something like:&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;Parámetros contiene %used mientras que sólo se soportan %supported o anterior.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* Example of variables with &amp;quot;:&amp;quot; that can not be translated and must be copied exactly:&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;The :property value exceeds the maximum of :max.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
  In that case, :property and :max must not be translated. The Spanish translation for this string would be something like:&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;El valor de :property excede el máximo de :max.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
=== All fieldnames must be kept in English===&lt;br /&gt;
* These names are hooks that are used in the software. You should not translate them.&lt;br /&gt;
* See the example below for the string uploadcourses_help in the file tool_uploadcourse for Moodle 3.1:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fieldnames are not to be translatd.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Notice that the string text indicates (red rectangle) that these words (enclosed in green rectangles) are fieldnames. Also notice that the Spanish translation clearly indicates, at the final part of the paragraph &#039;&#039;(así escritos, en inglés)&#039;&#039; that these fieldnames must be written in English as they are written here.&lt;br /&gt;
* Some used fieldnames in Moodle are:&lt;br /&gt;
 category, category_id, category_idnumber, category_path, context, course, description, descriptionformat, email, enrolmentkey, firstname, fullname, groupname, hidepicture, idnumber, intro, lastname, maxgrade, maxrequest, name, password, picture, section, shortname, teachers, timeopen, timeclose, timeend, timestart, username, visible, &lt;br /&gt;
* Examples of strings where these fielnames appear are uploadcohorts_help | core_cohort, importgroups_help | core_group, uploadcourses_help | tool_uploadcourse and uploadusers_help | tool_uploaduser.&lt;br /&gt;
* Note that these fieldnames may appear as real fieldnames (must not be translated) or as regular words in another context (can and must be translated). You should exercise caution and, If possible, always check that Moodle works correctly by testing your translations with some data in a real or test server.&lt;br /&gt;
===Local addresses after &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;../===&lt;br /&gt;
Addresses inside a Language string that have &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;../ reference a specific URL inside your Moodle server and you must keep the address part of the expression, but you can translate the descriptive name part. See the following example:&lt;br /&gt;
 noassignableroles | tool_cohortautoroles&lt;br /&gt;
 There are currently no roles that can be assigned in the user context. &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;../../roles/manage.php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Manage roles&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* You must keep the &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;../../roles/manage.php&amp;quot;&amp;gt; part, as this references to the [https://docs.moodle.org/31/en/PHP PHP] code in your Moodle server that will be executed in order to manage roles&lt;br /&gt;
* You can/should/must translate &#039;Manage roles&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not forget to keep the ending &amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Moodle Docs addresses after &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;http://docs.moodle.org/en/&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;===&lt;br /&gt;
Addresses inside a Language string that have &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;http://docs.moodle.org/en/ &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;reference a specific URL in the Moodle English Documentation. You must look at that address and &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; if your language has a valid translation for that page, you can/should replace the original English Docs address with your own language address. See the following example:&lt;br /&gt;
 core backup | nonisowarning&lt;br /&gt;
 Warning: this backup is from a non-Unicode version of Moodle (pre 1.6). If this backup contains any non-ISO-8859-1 texts then they may be CORRUPTED if you try to restore them to this Unicode version of Moodle. See the &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;http://docs.moodle.org/en/Backup_FAQ&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Backup FAQ&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt; for more information about how to recover this backup correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
* There are six different language translations for that page. So, you can only replace this address if your language is one of these.&lt;br /&gt;
===Other internet addresses after &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;http://===&lt;br /&gt;
* You must proceed as with Moodle Docs addresses:&lt;br /&gt;
* Example:&lt;br /&gt;
 auth_radius | auth_radiusdescription&lt;br /&gt;
 This method uses a &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/RADIUS&amp;quot;&amp;gt;RADIUS&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt; server to check whether a given username and password is valid.&lt;br /&gt;
* You must check the (English language wikipedia) page about the RADIUS server, and then you can decide whether to keep this address or replace it with your own language matching wikipedia translation.&lt;br /&gt;
===HTML codes that must not be translated===&lt;br /&gt;
The following HTML codes are reserved words that must not be translated. However, it is important for the translators to understand their meaning in order to decide whether to keep them in the translation and if so, whether they can be rearranged.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - non-breaking space i.e. a space but there will never be a line-break inserted instead of this space at the end of a line.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;ensp&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;emsp&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - denote an en space and an em space respectively, where an en space is half the point size and an em space is equal to the point size of the current font. For fixed pitch fonts, the user agent can treat the en space as being equivalent to a single space character, and the em space as being equuivalent to two space characters. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;amp&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - ampersand sign (&amp;amp;)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;apos&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - apostrophe sign (&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;copy&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - copyright sign (©)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;plusmn&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - &amp;quot;plus or minus&amp;quot; sign (±)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;times&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - multiply sign (*)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;divide&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - divide sign (/)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - &amp;quot;greater than&amp;quot; sign ( &amp;gt; )&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - &amp;quot;less than&amp;quot; sign (&amp;lt;) &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;laquo&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - quotation mark (‘)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lsquo&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - left single quotation sign (‘)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;rsquo&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - right single quotation sign (’)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;ouml&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - small letter o with diaeresis (ö)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;mdash&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; - [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash#Em_dash em dash] sign (—)&lt;br /&gt;
===Calculation functions must not be translated===&lt;br /&gt;
[https://docs.moodle.org/32/en/Grade_calculations#Calculation_functions Calculation functions] start with an equal sign (=). Following is an expression using operators and functions supported by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DO NOT translate calculation functions.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
===The &#039;thisdirection&#039; and &#039;thisdirectionvertical&#039; strings in core_langconfig should never be translated===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The &#039;thisdirection&#039; and &#039;thisdirectionvertical&#039; strings in core_langconfig should never be translated, as they are not variables meant to be translated. They are prefixing selectors used by the themes to display left-to-right or right-to-left languages. Read [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=328567#p1323101 more about problems with these variables].&lt;br /&gt;
===MoodleBox===&lt;br /&gt;
The word &#039;MoodleBox&#039; must be kept in all languages.&lt;br /&gt;
===Safe Exam Browser===&lt;br /&gt;
A feedback by the Safe Exam Browser main developer:&lt;br /&gt;
 The software is called “Safe Exam Browser” in any language, we don’t translate the name of the application. So it doesn’t make sense to translate it in any plugin, you could use it as a subtitle or in brackets, like “Safe Exam Browser (Navegador de Examen Seguro)”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Is there a way to check the integrity of all placeholders in a language pack?==&lt;br /&gt;
* Not a at the moment. See MDL-51775 .&lt;br /&gt;
* You can use [https://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=4661 this trick] to check for integrity:&lt;br /&gt;
** Load the language pack in a [https://download.moodle.org/windows/ local instance of Moodle].&lt;br /&gt;
**   In order to generate a [https://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=4098 translation memory], load the language pack in the [https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/Language_customisation Language customization] tool, so that the texts are loaded in the database.&lt;br /&gt;
**    Run the sql instance in the file (tm_generator.txt)&lt;br /&gt;
**    Insert the result of the query in template.tmx file&lt;br /&gt;
** The result is a translation memory that can be analysed with [http://www.opentag.com/okapi/wiki/index.php?title=CheckMate Checkmate].&lt;br /&gt;
** The problem: probably you will get many errors due to some characters that are not allowed by Checkmate so you will have to remove manually some translation units. After doing it, you will get a report with some possible errors (see the attached image).&lt;br /&gt;
** Of course, it would be great to have an integrated quality check system in Moodle. Vote for MDL-51775 .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The contents of the file tm_generator.txt are (&#039;&#039;&#039;change the language from eu to your language&#039;&#039;&#039;):&lt;br /&gt;
 SELECT concat(&#039;&amp;lt;tu tuid=&amp;quot;&#039;,mdl_tool_customlang_components.name,&#039;|&#039;,mdl_tool_customlang.stringid,&#039;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;tuv xml:lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;seg&amp;gt;&#039;,mdl_tool_customlang.original,&#039;&amp;lt;/seg&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tuv&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;tuv xml:lang=&amp;quot;&#039;,mdl_tool_customlang.lang,&#039;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;seg&amp;gt;&#039;,mdl_tool_customlang.master,&#039;&amp;lt;/seg&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tuv&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/tu&amp;gt;&#039;) as txt&lt;br /&gt;
 FROM mdl_tool_customlang INNER JOIN mdl_tool_customlang_components ON mdl_tool_customlang.componentid =  mdl_tool_customlang_components.id&lt;br /&gt;
 WHERE (((mdl_tool_customlang.lang)=&amp;quot;eu&amp;quot;) AND ((mdl_tool_customlang.original) Is Not Null) AND ((mdl_tool_customlang.master)  &amp;lt;&amp;gt;mdl_tool_customlang.original));&lt;br /&gt;
* the contents of the template.tmx file are:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;?xml version=&amp;quot;1.0&amp;quot; encoding=&amp;quot;UTF-8&amp;quot;?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tmx version=&amp;quot;1.4&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;header creationtool=&amp;quot;SQLQuery&amp;quot; creationtoolversion=&amp;quot;unknown&amp;quot; segtype=&amp;quot;paragraph&amp;quot; o-tmf=&amp;quot;unknown&amp;quot; adminlang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; srclang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; datatype=&amp;quot;unknown&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/header&amp;gt;&amp;lt;body&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 PLACE HERE THE RESULT OF THE SQL QUERY&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/body&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/tmx&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==What is a &#039;&#039;translation memory&#039;&#039; and how can I create a translation memory out of a Moodle language pack?==&lt;br /&gt;
* Read the &#039;Is there a way to check the integrity of all placeholders in a language pack?&#039; section above.&lt;br /&gt;
* See [https://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/user.php?id=1489&amp;amp;page=1 this post] and [https://dl.dropboxusercontent.com/u/86242384/moodle/en/publish/moodle_tm/website_index.html this tutorial].&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I help with translating Moodle documentation?==&lt;br /&gt;
Please see the guide [[Translating Moodle Docs]].&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I find out the context of the strings?==&lt;br /&gt;
You can find where a language string is located as described in the user docs [[:en:Language_customisation#Finding_the_component_and_string_identifier|Finding the component and string identifier]] and [[:en:Language FAQ|Language FAQ]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may wish to use two windows (perhaps using two monitors), with one displaying the page in English and the other displaying the page in your language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:two windows translation.jpg|Two simultaneous windows in two languages|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you think the original English language strings have more than one meaning and you can&#039;t guess which one applies, you are welcome to post in the [https://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=5 AMOS translation forum]. &lt;br /&gt;
==Is there a list of Moodle error messages which can be translated?==&lt;br /&gt;
Error messages are listed in the user docs [[:en:Category:Error|Category:Error]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can the subtitles for Moodle HQ YouTube videos be translated?==&lt;br /&gt;
You can contribute translations for Moodle videos used in [[https://moodle.academy/|Moodle Academy]] courses. Enrol in &#039;Translate Moodle Academy&#039; course in https://moodle.academy/enrol/index.php?id=52&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can the User Tours from Moodle.net be translated?==&lt;br /&gt;
* Yes. See [[Translating User tours from Moodle.net]]&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I test my plugins translations of several (different) Moodle branches?==&lt;br /&gt;
*Linux&lt;br /&gt;
** You can have several Moodle branches in one Ubuntu (or any other Linux distro) machine by following [https://docs.moodle.org/31/en/Step-by-step_Installation_Guide_for_Ubuntu#Hosting_several_Moodle_branches_in_one_Ubuntu_server these steps].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Windows&lt;br /&gt;
** You can have several [https://download.moodle.org/windows/ local Moodle servers] in different folders in a Windows (7,8,10) PC. It is very easy to start one branch server, work on it, stop it and then start a different branch.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Some early local Moodle (versions before 3.0) server packages from [https://download.moodle.org/windows/ https://download.moodle.org/windows/] only work in Windows 7, but apparently not in Windows 8 and definitely not in Windows 10, regardless of compatibility settings. For these you would need to install XAMP separately. Moodle 3.0 and newer branches do work under Windows 10.}}&lt;br /&gt;
*Mac&lt;br /&gt;
**We need to write about this...&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I translate a language pack offline / can I use another language then English as source language?==&lt;br /&gt;
Yes you can, but it is not recommended because there is a high risk of causing problems (remember - sites update language packs automatically, so your problem spreads quickly over the world).&lt;br /&gt;
One problem is that you absolutely have to avoid untranslated strings or strings in the wrong language in the language pack. This should NEVER happen. Another problem is that there is no way to know which strings are already translated. There is also a higher risk for syntax errors. If you have to, you can follow the following procedure:&lt;br /&gt;
* download the English language pack (or another one if you want a different source language)&lt;br /&gt;
* translate directly in the php file, preferably using something with syntax highlighting (Geany, Gedit, Notepad++ on Windows, ...)&lt;br /&gt;
* IMPORTANT: delete all not-translated lines from the file, before uploading - therefore it is probably best to translate line by line and keep the original source files, so you can work with a record of processed line numbers.&lt;br /&gt;
* import the files in the translation portal following the manual on https://docs.moodle.org/dev/AMOS_manual#Importing_a_file (IMPORTANT: zip file cannot contain any folders)&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I translate H5P content types?==&lt;br /&gt;
Use [https://translate-h5p.tk/weblate/projects/h5p/ the Weblate H5P project translation page] or see the h5p.org guide [https://h5p.org/adding-content-type-translation-via-github Adding content type translations via GitHub] and the forum discussion [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=414325 Translate H5P items].&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:en:Language customization|Language customization]] in the user docs for information on how to edit an existing language pack&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=4098#p4879 Generating a translation memory and running a quality test] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=347843 translation in context] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Übersetzung FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Translation&amp;diff=143975</id>
		<title>Translation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Translation&amp;diff=143975"/>
		<updated>2022-08-05T09:39:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: Creating a landing page for translation of Moodle academy&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
==So you&#039;d like to help with translating Moodle?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Great! :-) All translation of Moodle LMS  and the plugins happens on our &#039;&#039;&#039;[http://lang.moodle.org Moodle translation site]&#039;&#039;&#039;, so you&#039;ll need to start by creating an account there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps you&#039;ve found some words or phrases not yet translated into your language? Or you&#039;ve spotted a mistake? If so, please see the guide to [[Contributing a translation]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you&#039;d like to help translate more than just a few strings, please contact the maintainer of your language pack as listed in the [http://lang.moodle.org/local/amos/credits.php Translation credits] and ask where you can help.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Did you end up here, wanting to translate the [https://moodle.academy Moodle Academy courses], please start at [[Translation Moodle Academy]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wish to take on responsibility for a language pack?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please see [[Maintaining a language pack]] and the [[AMOS manual]]  for further information about the AMOS translation toolkit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Is Moodle not yet translated into your language?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please see  [[Starting a new language pack]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Any questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please check the [[Translation  FAQ]] and join us in the [http://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=5 Using AMOS forum].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Traduction]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Übersetzung]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Traducción]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Translation&amp;diff=143974</id>
		<title>Translation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Translation&amp;diff=143974"/>
		<updated>2022-08-05T09:39:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: /* So you&amp;#039;d like to help with translating Moodle? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
==So you&#039;d like to help with translating Moodle?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Great! :-) All translation of Moodle LMS  and the plugins happens on our &#039;&#039;&#039;[http://lang.moodle.org Moodle translation site]&#039;&#039;&#039;, so you&#039;ll need to start by creating an account there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps you&#039;ve found some words or phrases not yet translated into your language? Or you&#039;ve spotted a mistake? If so, please see the guide to [[Contributing a translation]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you&#039;d like to help translate more than just a few strings, please contact the maintainer of your language pack as listed in the [http://lang.moodle.org/local/amos/credits.php Translation credits] and ask where you can help.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Did you end up here, wanting to translate the [https://moodle.academy Moodle Academy courses], please start at [Translation Moodle Academy]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wish to take on responsibility for a language pack?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please see [[Maintaining a language pack]] and the [[AMOS manual]]  for further information about the AMOS translation toolkit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Is Moodle not yet translated into your language?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please see  [[Starting a new language pack]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Any questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please check the [[Translation  FAQ]] and join us in the [http://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=5 Using AMOS forum].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Traduction]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Übersetzung]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Traducción]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Decimal_separator&amp;diff=143973</id>
		<title>Decimal separator</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Decimal_separator&amp;diff=143973"/>
		<updated>2022-08-05T08:31:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: /* Using English language pack with a decimal comma */ updating outdated links&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Translation}}&lt;br /&gt;
The langconfig file is an important file in a language pack, dealing with all the configuration parameters of that language, including the decimal separator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The original Moodle code in English uses a [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Decimal_mark decimal point as a separator], but some countries (and their language packs) might use a decimal comma.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Countries where a dot &amp;quot;.&amp;quot; is used as decimal mark:==&lt;br /&gt;
* Australia&lt;br /&gt;
* Bangladesh&lt;br /&gt;
* Botswana&lt;br /&gt;
* British West Indies&lt;br /&gt;
* Brunei&lt;br /&gt;
* Canada (when using English)&lt;br /&gt;
* China, People&#039;s Republic of&lt;br /&gt;
* Dominican Republic&lt;br /&gt;
* Egypt&lt;br /&gt;
* Ghana&lt;br /&gt;
* Guatemala&lt;br /&gt;
* Honduras&lt;br /&gt;
* Hong Kong&lt;br /&gt;
* India&lt;br /&gt;
* Ireland&lt;br /&gt;
* Israel&lt;br /&gt;
* Japan&lt;br /&gt;
* Jordan&lt;br /&gt;
* Kenya&lt;br /&gt;
* Korea (both North and South)&lt;br /&gt;
* Lebanon&lt;br /&gt;
* Luxembourg (uses both marks officially)&lt;br /&gt;
* Macau (in Chinese and English text)&lt;br /&gt;
* Malaysia&lt;br /&gt;
* Malta&lt;br /&gt;
* Mexico&lt;br /&gt;
* Mongolia&lt;br /&gt;
* Nepal&lt;br /&gt;
* New Zealand&lt;br /&gt;
* Nicaragua&lt;br /&gt;
* Nigeria&lt;br /&gt;
* Pakistan&lt;br /&gt;
* Palestine&lt;br /&gt;
* Panama&lt;br /&gt;
* Philippines&lt;br /&gt;
* Singapore&lt;br /&gt;
* Sri Lanka&lt;br /&gt;
* Switzerland&lt;br /&gt;
* Taiwan&lt;br /&gt;
* Tanzania&lt;br /&gt;
* Thailand&lt;br /&gt;
* Uganda&lt;br /&gt;
* United Kingdom&lt;br /&gt;
* United States (including insular areas)&lt;br /&gt;
* Zimbabwe&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Countries where a comma &amp;quot;,&amp;quot; is used as decimal mark:==&lt;br /&gt;
* Albania&lt;br /&gt;
* Algeria&lt;br /&gt;
* Andorra&lt;br /&gt;
* Angola&lt;br /&gt;
* Argentina&lt;br /&gt;
* Armenia&lt;br /&gt;
* Austria&lt;br /&gt;
* Azerbaijan&lt;br /&gt;
* Belarus&lt;br /&gt;
* Belgium&lt;br /&gt;
* Bolivia&lt;br /&gt;
* Bosnia and Herzegovina&lt;br /&gt;
* Brazil&lt;br /&gt;
* Bulgaria&lt;br /&gt;
* Cameroon&lt;br /&gt;
* Canada (when using French)&lt;br /&gt;
* Chile&lt;br /&gt;
* Colombia&lt;br /&gt;
* Costa Rica&lt;br /&gt;
* Croatia (comma used officially, but both forms are in use)&lt;br /&gt;
* Cuba&lt;br /&gt;
* Cyprus&lt;br /&gt;
* Czech Republic&lt;br /&gt;
* Denmark&lt;br /&gt;
* East Timor&lt;br /&gt;
* Ecuador&lt;br /&gt;
* Estonia&lt;br /&gt;
* Faroes&lt;br /&gt;
* Finland&lt;br /&gt;
* France&lt;br /&gt;
* Germany&lt;br /&gt;
* Georgia&lt;br /&gt;
* Greece&lt;br /&gt;
* Greenland&lt;br /&gt;
* Hungary&lt;br /&gt;
* Iceland&lt;br /&gt;
* Indonesia&lt;br /&gt;
* Italy&lt;br /&gt;
* Kazakhstan&lt;br /&gt;
* Kosovo&lt;br /&gt;
* Kyrgyzstan&lt;br /&gt;
* Latvia&lt;br /&gt;
* Lebanon&lt;br /&gt;
* Lithuania&lt;br /&gt;
* Luxembourg (uses both marks officially)&lt;br /&gt;
* Macau (in Portuguese text)&lt;br /&gt;
* Macedonia&lt;br /&gt;
* Moldova&lt;br /&gt;
* Mongolia&lt;br /&gt;
* Morocco&lt;br /&gt;
* Mozambique&lt;br /&gt;
* Namibia&lt;br /&gt;
* The Netherlands&lt;br /&gt;
* Norway&lt;br /&gt;
* Paraguay&lt;br /&gt;
* Peru&lt;br /&gt;
* Poland&lt;br /&gt;
* Portugal&lt;br /&gt;
* Romania&lt;br /&gt;
* Russia&lt;br /&gt;
* Serbia&lt;br /&gt;
* Slovakia&lt;br /&gt;
* Slovenia&lt;br /&gt;
* South Africa&lt;br /&gt;
* Spain&lt;br /&gt;
* Switzerland&lt;br /&gt;
* Sweden&lt;br /&gt;
* Tunisia&lt;br /&gt;
* Turkey&lt;br /&gt;
* Ukraine&lt;br /&gt;
* Uruguay&lt;br /&gt;
* Uzbekistan&lt;br /&gt;
* Venezuela&lt;br /&gt;
* Vietnam&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problems with language packs using a decimal comma===&lt;br /&gt;
If a language pack uses a comma (,) as a decimal separator, it &#039;&#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039;&#039; use a semicolon (;) as a [https://docs.moodle.org/dev/Translation_langconfig#listsep.2Ccore_langconfig list separator], or serious errors might happen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See all the reported issues (fixed and not-fixed) at [https://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-28238?jql=text%20~%20%22decimal%20comma%22 the Moodle Tracker]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* It is not uncommon for Moodle users with a language pack that has a comma used as a decimal separator to experience problems when using formulas copied from the Moodle English online and built-in documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Gradebook problems====&lt;br /&gt;
The [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grader_report Gradebook] calculations might use &amp;quot;=average(item1, item2, item3, item4, item5, item6)&amp;quot; which is easy to understand and use in English, but a teacher with (for example) the international spanish (es) language pack will strugle until he/she realizes that this formula should be changed to &amp;quot;=average(item1; item2; item3; item4; item5; item6)&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Cloze questions problems====&lt;br /&gt;
Cloze marks a correct numeric answer as a wrong one while using a comma as a decimal separator. See MDL-33744&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Pmatch and other Open University question types problems=====&lt;br /&gt;
[https://docs.moodle.org/31/en/Pattern-match_question_type Pmatch] (and other question types made by the Open University) was created for use in an English university. Therefore, all the special code for handing numbers just assumes the decimal separator is a full stop. See [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=340313 this forum thread]. The suggested fix is to only use a full stop as a decimal separator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Quiz problems====&lt;br /&gt;
As reported in [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=312003 this forum thread], there are no hints on interactive with multiple tries quiz when using comma on some languages that use a comma as decimal marker in the answer (as opposed to a full stop). The quiz does not show hints (using interactive with multiple attempts). The quiz instead regards the use of the comma as &amp;quot;incomplete&amp;quot; even though it will mark this answer as correct or incorrect on deferred feedback. The suggested fix is to never use a decimal comma as a thousand separator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Problem fixing==&lt;br /&gt;
A Moodle adminer who uses a language pack with a decimal comma must check the [https://docs.moodle.org/dev/Translation_langconfig langconfig file] and make sure that the decsep, listsep and thousandssep characters are properly set for the language or use the  [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Language_customisationLanguage customization] to fix his/her server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using English language pack with a decimal comma==&lt;br /&gt;
* If you want English text, but with non-english decimal separator, the way to achieve this is to make a new language pack en_commadecimal, or something like that.&lt;br /&gt;
* You should only need to create the langconfig.php part of the language pack, to say that the parent language is English, and what the decimal and thousands separators are.&lt;br /&gt;
* See https://docs.moodle.org/en/Starting_a_new_language_pack and https://docs.moodle.org/en/Language_packs&lt;br /&gt;
* See [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=342323 this forum thread]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Separador decimal]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Decimal_separator&amp;diff=143972</id>
		<title>Decimal separator</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Decimal_separator&amp;diff=143972"/>
		<updated>2022-08-05T08:29:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: This is important information for translators&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Translation}}&lt;br /&gt;
The langconfig file is an important file in a language pack, dealing with all the configuration parameters of that language, including the decimal separator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The original Moodle code in English uses a [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Decimal_mark decimal point as a separator], but some countries (and their language packs) might use a decimal comma.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Countries where a dot &amp;quot;.&amp;quot; is used as decimal mark:==&lt;br /&gt;
* Australia&lt;br /&gt;
* Bangladesh&lt;br /&gt;
* Botswana&lt;br /&gt;
* British West Indies&lt;br /&gt;
* Brunei&lt;br /&gt;
* Canada (when using English)&lt;br /&gt;
* China, People&#039;s Republic of&lt;br /&gt;
* Dominican Republic&lt;br /&gt;
* Egypt&lt;br /&gt;
* Ghana&lt;br /&gt;
* Guatemala&lt;br /&gt;
* Honduras&lt;br /&gt;
* Hong Kong&lt;br /&gt;
* India&lt;br /&gt;
* Ireland&lt;br /&gt;
* Israel&lt;br /&gt;
* Japan&lt;br /&gt;
* Jordan&lt;br /&gt;
* Kenya&lt;br /&gt;
* Korea (both North and South)&lt;br /&gt;
* Lebanon&lt;br /&gt;
* Luxembourg (uses both marks officially)&lt;br /&gt;
* Macau (in Chinese and English text)&lt;br /&gt;
* Malaysia&lt;br /&gt;
* Malta&lt;br /&gt;
* Mexico&lt;br /&gt;
* Mongolia&lt;br /&gt;
* Nepal&lt;br /&gt;
* New Zealand&lt;br /&gt;
* Nicaragua&lt;br /&gt;
* Nigeria&lt;br /&gt;
* Pakistan&lt;br /&gt;
* Palestine&lt;br /&gt;
* Panama&lt;br /&gt;
* Philippines&lt;br /&gt;
* Singapore&lt;br /&gt;
* Sri Lanka&lt;br /&gt;
* Switzerland&lt;br /&gt;
* Taiwan&lt;br /&gt;
* Tanzania&lt;br /&gt;
* Thailand&lt;br /&gt;
* Uganda&lt;br /&gt;
* United Kingdom&lt;br /&gt;
* United States (including insular areas)&lt;br /&gt;
* Zimbabwe&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Countries where a comma &amp;quot;,&amp;quot; is used as decimal mark:==&lt;br /&gt;
* Albania&lt;br /&gt;
* Algeria&lt;br /&gt;
* Andorra&lt;br /&gt;
* Angola&lt;br /&gt;
* Argentina&lt;br /&gt;
* Armenia&lt;br /&gt;
* Austria&lt;br /&gt;
* Azerbaijan&lt;br /&gt;
* Belarus&lt;br /&gt;
* Belgium&lt;br /&gt;
* Bolivia&lt;br /&gt;
* Bosnia and Herzegovina&lt;br /&gt;
* Brazil&lt;br /&gt;
* Bulgaria&lt;br /&gt;
* Cameroon&lt;br /&gt;
* Canada (when using French)&lt;br /&gt;
* Chile&lt;br /&gt;
* Colombia&lt;br /&gt;
* Costa Rica&lt;br /&gt;
* Croatia (comma used officially, but both forms are in use)&lt;br /&gt;
* Cuba&lt;br /&gt;
* Cyprus&lt;br /&gt;
* Czech Republic&lt;br /&gt;
* Denmark&lt;br /&gt;
* East Timor&lt;br /&gt;
* Ecuador&lt;br /&gt;
* Estonia&lt;br /&gt;
* Faroes&lt;br /&gt;
* Finland&lt;br /&gt;
* France&lt;br /&gt;
* Germany&lt;br /&gt;
* Georgia&lt;br /&gt;
* Greece&lt;br /&gt;
* Greenland&lt;br /&gt;
* Hungary&lt;br /&gt;
* Iceland&lt;br /&gt;
* Indonesia&lt;br /&gt;
* Italy&lt;br /&gt;
* Kazakhstan&lt;br /&gt;
* Kosovo&lt;br /&gt;
* Kyrgyzstan&lt;br /&gt;
* Latvia&lt;br /&gt;
* Lebanon&lt;br /&gt;
* Lithuania&lt;br /&gt;
* Luxembourg (uses both marks officially)&lt;br /&gt;
* Macau (in Portuguese text)&lt;br /&gt;
* Macedonia&lt;br /&gt;
* Moldova&lt;br /&gt;
* Mongolia&lt;br /&gt;
* Morocco&lt;br /&gt;
* Mozambique&lt;br /&gt;
* Namibia&lt;br /&gt;
* The Netherlands&lt;br /&gt;
* Norway&lt;br /&gt;
* Paraguay&lt;br /&gt;
* Peru&lt;br /&gt;
* Poland&lt;br /&gt;
* Portugal&lt;br /&gt;
* Romania&lt;br /&gt;
* Russia&lt;br /&gt;
* Serbia&lt;br /&gt;
* Slovakia&lt;br /&gt;
* Slovenia&lt;br /&gt;
* South Africa&lt;br /&gt;
* Spain&lt;br /&gt;
* Switzerland&lt;br /&gt;
* Sweden&lt;br /&gt;
* Tunisia&lt;br /&gt;
* Turkey&lt;br /&gt;
* Ukraine&lt;br /&gt;
* Uruguay&lt;br /&gt;
* Uzbekistan&lt;br /&gt;
* Venezuela&lt;br /&gt;
* Vietnam&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problems with language packs using a decimal comma===&lt;br /&gt;
If a language pack uses a comma (,) as a decimal separator, it &#039;&#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039;&#039; use a semicolon (;) as a [https://docs.moodle.org/dev/Translation_langconfig#listsep.2Ccore_langconfig list separator], or serious errors might happen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See all the reported issues (fixed and not-fixed) at [https://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-28238?jql=text%20~%20%22decimal%20comma%22 the Moodle Tracker]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* It is not uncommon for Moodle users with a language pack that has a comma used as a decimal separator to experience problems when using formulas copied from the Moodle English online and built-in documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Gradebook problems====&lt;br /&gt;
The [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grader_report Gradebook] calculations might use &amp;quot;=average(item1, item2, item3, item4, item5, item6)&amp;quot; which is easy to understand and use in English, but a teacher with (for example) the international spanish (es) language pack will strugle until he/she realizes that this formula should be changed to &amp;quot;=average(item1; item2; item3; item4; item5; item6)&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Cloze questions problems====&lt;br /&gt;
Cloze marks a correct numeric answer as a wrong one while using a comma as a decimal separator. See MDL-33744&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Pmatch and other Open University question types problems=====&lt;br /&gt;
[https://docs.moodle.org/31/en/Pattern-match_question_type Pmatch] (and other question types made by the Open University) was created for use in an English university. Therefore, all the special code for handing numbers just assumes the decimal separator is a full stop. See [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=340313 this forum thread]. The suggested fix is to only use a full stop as a decimal separator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Quiz problems====&lt;br /&gt;
As reported in [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=312003 this forum thread], there are no hints on interactive with multiple tries quiz when using comma on some languages that use a comma as decimal marker in the answer (as opposed to a full stop). The quiz does not show hints (using interactive with multiple attempts). The quiz instead regards the use of the comma as &amp;quot;incomplete&amp;quot; even though it will mark this answer as correct or incorrect on deferred feedback. The suggested fix is to never use a decimal comma as a thousand separator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Problem fixing==&lt;br /&gt;
A Moodle adminer who uses a language pack with a decimal comma must check the [https://docs.moodle.org/dev/Translation_langconfig langconfig file] and make sure that the decsep, listsep and thousandssep characters are properly set for the language or use the  [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Language_customisationLanguage customization] to fix his/her server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using English language pack with a decimal comma==&lt;br /&gt;
* If you want English text, but with non-english decimal separator, the way to achieve this is to make a new language pack en_commadecimal, or something like that.&lt;br /&gt;
* You should only need to create the langconfig.php part of the language pack, to say that the parent language is English, and what the decimal and thousands separators are.&lt;br /&gt;
* See https://docs.moodle.org/dev/Starting_a_new_language_pack and https://docs.moodle.org/31/en/Language_packs&lt;br /&gt;
* See [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=342323 this forum thread]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Separador decimal]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Category:Translation&amp;diff=143971</id>
		<title>Category:Translation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Category:Translation&amp;diff=143971"/>
		<updated>2022-08-05T08:27:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: Creating page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;These pages contain important information for users who want to translate the Moodle software in their own language.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=AMOS&amp;diff=143970</id>
		<title>AMOS</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=AMOS&amp;diff=143970"/>
		<updated>2022-08-05T08:16:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: wrong redirct&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[AMOS_manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=mod/diary/report&amp;diff=142802</id>
		<title>mod/diary/report</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=mod/diary/report&amp;diff=142802"/>
		<updated>2022-01-17T11:12:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: Redirected page to Diary&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Diary]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=mod/diary/mod&amp;diff=142801</id>
		<title>mod/diary/mod</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=mod/diary/mod&amp;diff=142801"/>
		<updated>2022-01-17T11:10:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: Redirected page to Diary&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Diary]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=mod/diary/view&amp;diff=142800</id>
		<title>mod/diary/view</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=mod/diary/view&amp;diff=142800"/>
		<updated>2022-01-17T11:10:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: Redirected page to Diary&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Diary]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=mod/diary/reportsingle&amp;diff=142799</id>
		<title>mod/diary/reportsingle</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=mod/diary/reportsingle&amp;diff=142799"/>
		<updated>2022-01-17T11:08:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: Redirected page to Diary&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Diary]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Talk:Standards&amp;diff=141677</id>
		<title>Talk:Standards</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Talk:Standards&amp;diff=141677"/>
		<updated>2021-09-15T07:15:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page is in need of an update, as it does not mention LTI Advantage certification, LTI 2.0 (declared deprecated when 1.3 / Advantage was released).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, more clarity on the nature of the supported open standards is welcome.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ical for importing / exporting calendar events is also missing&lt;br /&gt;
For authentication, enrolment etc it might be better to explicitly point to the documentation, since there are a lot of standards supported. Now it looks like it&#039;s only LDAP.&lt;br /&gt;
 --[[User:koen roggemans|koen roggemans]] ([[User talk:koen roggemans|talk]]) 07:15, 15 September 2021 (UTC)&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Language_packs&amp;diff=141484</id>
		<title>Language packs</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Language_packs&amp;diff=141484"/>
		<updated>2021-08-12T07:56:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: /* Parent language packs and child language packs */ removing inaccurate list and replace the list with a reference to the automatically up to date information.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Language pack installation and uninstallation==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:installing a lang pack.png|thumb|Installing a language pack]]&lt;br /&gt;
Over 100 language packs are available for an administrator to install on your Moodle site in &#039;Language packs&#039; in the Site administration. Simply select the languages you require from the list of available language packs and click on the &amp;quot;Install selected language pack&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New in 3.11:&#039;&#039;&#039; A new search box allows administrators to quickly locate a language pack for installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple language packs may be selected for install by holding down the Apple or Ctrl key whilst clicking on the language packs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Installing many (20+) language packs has [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=241098 almost 0 impact] on Moodle performance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple language packs may be uninstalled, once selected, by clicking the &#039;Uninstall selected language packs&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
===Language packs and manual download===&lt;br /&gt;
Language packs are a work-in-progress, since new language strings are added for new features in each new version of Moodle. Lang packs can be manually downloaded from [https://download.moodle.org/langpack/{{Version}}/ Language packs for Moodle {{Version}}]. The page also lists the percentage of language strings translated in each language pack.&lt;br /&gt;
==Parent language packs and child language packs==&lt;br /&gt;
Certain language packs (a child language pack) contain only the modified language strings from their parent language, rather than a complete set. Thus, it is necessary to install the parent language pack too. On &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://download.moodle.org/langpack/3.11/&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; (replace 3.11 by the correct version number) you can see those languages printed in &#039;&#039;italic&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If your site uses a child language pack and if you use the [[Multi-language content filter]], you need to be very careful about how to use if (as reported in MDL-55197). See [[Multi-language content filter]] for more details and examples.&lt;br /&gt;
==Manual language pack installation==&lt;br /&gt;
In general, the easiest way to install additional language packs is from within Moodle. However, it is also possible to install a language pack manually by downloading the zip file from [https://download.moodle.org/langpack/{{Version}}/ Language packs for Moodle {{Version}}] and unzipping it to a directory called &#039;&#039;lang&#039;&#039; in your &#039;&#039;moodledata&#039;&#039; directory.&lt;br /&gt;
==Language pack updates==&lt;br /&gt;
* Language packs can be updated via &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Language &amp;gt; Language packs&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can see which language packs have updates because they are listed in both &#039;Installed language packs&#039; and &#039;Available language packs&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* To update all installed language packs (except English and any local language packs) click the &#039;Update all installed language packs&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
* For sites with a large number of language packs installed, to update just a few installed language packs at a time, select the languages from the &#039;Available language packs&#039; list and click the &#039;Install selected language pack(s)&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
* The English language pack is updated automatically each time the site is upgraded.&lt;br /&gt;
* As most language packs are a work in progress, it is a good idea to update them regularly.&lt;br /&gt;
All installed language packs are updated as a [[Scheduled tasks|scheduled task]]. By default the task is run daily.&lt;br /&gt;
==Moodle can not connect to download.moodle.org==&lt;br /&gt;
This can happen if:&lt;br /&gt;
* You configured over-zealous security restrictions in your server. Check that your server can contact the download.moodle.org server.&lt;br /&gt;
* The download.moodle.org server is down and if you try to manually download the language pack, it fails too. Please try again later.&lt;br /&gt;
* Your internet service is faulty :(&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ERROR language import not available.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Inside a language pack==&lt;br /&gt;
A standard Moodle comes with an English language pack only. It is installed in &#039;&#039;moodledata/lang/en.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The English language terms (or &#039;strings&#039;) for the main (core) Moodle features such as administration, roles etc, are stored in &#039;&#039;lang/en.&#039;&#039; Language files relating to modules, blocks and other plugins are stored with the files of that particular plugin. So if you wanted to see the language strings for the badges block for example, you would look in &#039;&#039;blocks/badges/lang/en&#039;&#039;. If you wanted to see the language files for the workshop module, you would look in&#039;&#039; mod/workshop/lang/en&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you install another language pack, you will then get a folder such as &#039;&#039;lang/fr&#039;&#039; which would have French translations of Moodle terms. Unlike with English, other language packs such as &#039;&#039;lang/fr&#039;&#039; will contain all translations along with the main core terms so you would find see for example the badges strings in &#039;&#039;lang/fr/block_badges.php&#039;&#039; and the workshop strings in &#039;&#039;lang/fr/workshop.php&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These files (which all end in .php) contain short phrases, often called &amp;quot;strings&amp;quot;. Strings may contain a placeholder (between the curly brackets below). This placeholder is replaced with the chosen words from the language pack when the string is displayed. The term between the square brackets is called the &#039;string identifier&#039; or the &#039;string name&#039;. Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
 $string[&#039;addnewcourse&#039;] = &#039;Add a new course&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
 $string[&#039;hidesection&#039;] = &#039;Hide section {$a}&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
If a string hasn&#039;t been translated, then Moodle will use the parent language or the original English version. Thus, you might see a Moodle site where some terms have been translated into a language but others still display in English.&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I personalize language strings per theme?==&lt;br /&gt;
Not directly, but you can use new local (child) language packs to achieve different courses behaviours/looks&lt;br /&gt;
===Changing the look of a course===&lt;br /&gt;
You can have a course with a different theme &#039;and&#039; a different child language pack. You will then have personalized language strings in the only course that uses that particular theme.&lt;br /&gt;
===Changing the behaviour of a course===&lt;br /&gt;
* If you do not want a student to see any reference to grades when he/she finishes a lesson, by editing the correct text string, it is possible to replace &amp;quot;Your score is 9 (out of 10)&amp;quot; with &amp;quot;Be sure to get your certificate&amp;quot;. Or change &amp;quot;Congratulations - end of lesson reached&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;We hoped this lesson helped you&amp;quot;. See [[Lesson_FAQ#Can_I_change_the_End_of_Lesson_page_display|how to change the end of lesson page display]].&lt;br /&gt;
* You can have several different courses, each using a different (child) language pack and each one showing personalized language strings.&lt;br /&gt;
* See [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=220671 this forum post] for detailed instructions on how to create your new child languages.&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I install one particular language pack and supplement the missing translations using a second (related) language pack?==&lt;br /&gt;
* The short answer is No.&lt;br /&gt;
* But there is a complicated way to achieve this :(&lt;br /&gt;
** You can use the [[Language customization]] tool. If you do make your own translations, please consider [https://docs.moodle.org/dev/Contributing_a_translation contribuiting your translated strings] to the language pack maintainers, so that your language pack can grow.&lt;br /&gt;
** See the Spanish language Moodle Documentation page at [https://docs.moodle.org/all/es/Suplementar_todas_las_traducciones_faltantes_del_Espa%C3%B1ol_internacional_con_traducciones_del_Espa%C3%B1ol_de_M%C3%A9xico Suplementar todas las traducciones faltantes del Español internacional] and [https://docs.moodle.org/all/es/Personalizaci%C3%B3n_del_idioma_(transplantar_archivos) https://docs.moodle.org/all/es/Personalización del idioma (transplantar archivos)] about grafting files from one language into another.&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I make a language pack for kids?==&lt;br /&gt;
* Yes.&lt;br /&gt;
* The current existing language packs for kids are:&lt;br /&gt;
** de_kids (which require de)&lt;br /&gt;
** en_kids (which require the default en)&lt;br /&gt;
** he_kids (which requires he)&lt;br /&gt;
** ja_kids (which requires ja)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you want to make a language pack for kids in a language different from the ones listed above, use the following method:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
** Install the (en_kids) English for kids language pack in your local Moodle server&lt;br /&gt;
** You will have to edit 10 files (which are stored in the moodledata/lang/en_kids folder). &lt;br /&gt;
** You can use [https://notepad-plus-plus.org/ Notepad++] or any other text editor, but avoid using MS Word or MS Notepad.&lt;br /&gt;
* Start with langconfig.php and choose your main language as the parentlanguage&lt;br /&gt;
* When you have finished translating all the strings, you can [https://docs.moodle.org/dev/Starting_a_new_language_pack  request a new language pack] to the person administering all Moodle language packs.&lt;br /&gt;
* Upload into AMOS the 10 files in your moodledata/lang/en_kids folder&lt;br /&gt;
* Remember to keep updating and expanding your new language pack&lt;br /&gt;
==Why do some languages have several different language packs available?==&lt;br /&gt;
See [https://docs.moodle.org/dev/Translation_FAQ#Moodle_languages_with_several_available_language_packs the developer&#039;s documentation] about this.&lt;br /&gt;
==Why has my language pack suddenly forgotten some translations?==&lt;br /&gt;
See the following image showing (Insignias) a properly translated Spanish language string (green rectangle) and an unstranslated English language string (red rectangle) for &#039;Badges&#039; plus a mixture of translated and untranslated strings with a language pack that should have 100% of the core strings translated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Language packs mixed-up llanguages shown.png|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you try to update your language packs you will get a message indicating &#039;Update of &#039;xxxx_old&#039; language pack skipped. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Something_old language pack can not be updated.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Read the following section for the cause and the fix.&lt;br /&gt;
==Why do I have a language pack named xx_old&#039; that I never installed?==&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes you may find (see image below) that your server has, in addition to your usual language packs (eg, en, es_mx), an odd-named language pack with an _old name ending (eg, es_mx_old), that -obviously- can not be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
* This came from an incomplete automated language pack update because the lang pack update fails in the middle of the process.&lt;br /&gt;
**The update first renames the existing lang directory so that it has the _old suffix and then it tries to unzip the new one.&lt;br /&gt;
** If unzipping is successful, the old directory is removed. &lt;br /&gt;
** Check that the [https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/admin/environment/php_extension/zip ZIP] PHP extension is OK in the [[Environment]].&lt;br /&gt;
** If your server has languages other than English, the language packs update process will need to download all the corresponding language packs, which will take some time. If you have a low speed internet provider, you could get a script timeout error. To prevent this, you will need to edit the server/php/php.ini file and change the line that has &#039;max_execution_time = 30&#039; into &#039;max_execution_time = 600&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* There may also be a language pack that has mixed languages, like &#039;English (es_mx)&#039;, that obviously can not be.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Odd-named installed language pack.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
* The reason why the language menu shows it is because moodledata/lang/es_mx/ is incomplete and its langconfig.php is missing so the translation of the string &amp;quot;thislanguage&amp;quot; (name of it) falls back to the default English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You must uninstall all strange-looking language packs and re-install your usual language packs.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Language packs uninstall all mixed-up languages.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* List of [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_ISO_639-1_codes language codes] on Wikipedia&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:dev:Translation]] and help us to translate Moodle to more languages&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Hizkuntza-paketeak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Paquetes de idioma]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Paquetages de langue]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:言語インポートユーティリティ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Sprachpakete]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Flashcard_module&amp;diff=139212</id>
		<title>Flashcard module</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Flashcard_module&amp;diff=139212"/>
		<updated>2021-01-02T15:43:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: /* See also */ removed dead link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = Activity&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/mod_flashcard&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = https://github.com/vfremaux/moodle-mod_flashcard&lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = https://moodle.org/plugins/mod_flashcard&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[User:Valery Fremaux|Valery Fremaux]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The flashcard module allows editing and playing flashcards. Flashcards are a &amp;quot;memory training&amp;quot; device that uses the concept of repetition. Checking a flashcard deck will present the student the couples of relationships to be memorized. More often the associations are reviewed, deeper the memorization will be engraved into our memorial circuits.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The flashcard module has been useful for formative assessment of anatomy, histology and pathology concepts, definitions and images in the teaching of human and veterinary medicine at undergraduate and postgraduate levels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Features==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Getting cards from a &amp;quot;matching question&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* Editing cards&lt;br /&gt;
* Multimedia cards: text, image, sound and image + sound together&lt;br /&gt;
* Automated backpropagation of cards (can be disabled)&lt;br /&gt;
* Customizable decks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuration==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Flashcard module: Configuration Parameters]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Flashcard module: Capabilities]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding new cards===&lt;br /&gt;
# Add new &amp;quot;Flash Card Set&amp;quot; into the course&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter required field &amp;quot;Name&amp;quot; and click &amp;quot;Save and display&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &amp;quot;Edit the cards&amp;quot; tabs - you will be brought to screen like below&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:flashcard1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &amp;quot;Add three new questions&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
# Add text for questions and answers&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &amp;quot;Update&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screens==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Student Screens=== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Flashcard module: Freeplay Screen|Freeplay Screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Leitner Play Screens&lt;br /&gt;
** [[Flashcard module: Leitner Choose A Deck|Choose a deck to play with]]&lt;br /&gt;
** [[Flashcard module: Leitner Use A Deck|Use a deck]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Teacher Screens===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Summary Screens&lt;br /&gt;
**[[Flashcard module: By User Summary|By User Summary]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[Flashcard module: By Card Summary|By Card Summary]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Flashcard module: Edit Screen|Edit Screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* The [https://h5p.org/flashcards flashcards module] and [https://h5p.org/dialog-cards dialog cards] for [https://moodle.org/plugins/mod_hvp H5P] - Free interactive HTML5 flashcards. Create a set of stylish and intuitive flashcards that have images paired with questions and answers. Use this content type with H5P in publishing systems like Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Lesson_module#The_Flash_card_lesson|Flash card presentation]] in the [[Lesson module]] is an alternative to this module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Medicine]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr: Flashcard]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Módulo flashcard]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Flashcard_module&amp;diff=139211</id>
		<title>Flashcard module</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Flashcard_module&amp;diff=139211"/>
		<updated>2021-01-02T15:43:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: /* See also */ removed dead link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = Activity&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/mod_flashcard&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = https://github.com/vfremaux/moodle-mod_flashcard&lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = https://moodle.org/plugins/mod_flashcard&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[User:Valery Fremaux|Valery Fremaux]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The flashcard module allows editing and playing flashcards. Flashcards are a &amp;quot;memory training&amp;quot; device that uses the concept of repetition. Checking a flashcard deck will present the student the couples of relationships to be memorized. More often the associations are reviewed, deeper the memorization will be engraved into our memorial circuits.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The flashcard module has been useful for formative assessment of anatomy, histology and pathology concepts, definitions and images in the teaching of human and veterinary medicine at undergraduate and postgraduate levels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Features==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Getting cards from a &amp;quot;matching question&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* Editing cards&lt;br /&gt;
* Multimedia cards: text, image, sound and image + sound together&lt;br /&gt;
* Automated backpropagation of cards (can be disabled)&lt;br /&gt;
* Customizable decks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuration==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Flashcard module: Configuration Parameters]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Flashcard module: Capabilities]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding new cards===&lt;br /&gt;
# Add new &amp;quot;Flash Card Set&amp;quot; into the course&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter required field &amp;quot;Name&amp;quot; and click &amp;quot;Save and display&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &amp;quot;Edit the cards&amp;quot; tabs - you will be brought to screen like below&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:flashcard1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &amp;quot;Add three new questions&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
# Add text for questions and answers&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &amp;quot;Update&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screens==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Student Screens=== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Flashcard module: Freeplay Screen|Freeplay Screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Leitner Play Screens&lt;br /&gt;
** [[Flashcard module: Leitner Choose A Deck|Choose a deck to play with]]&lt;br /&gt;
** [[Flashcard module: Leitner Use A Deck|Use a deck]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Teacher Screens===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Summary Screens&lt;br /&gt;
**[[Flashcard module: By User Summary|By User Summary]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[Flashcard module: By Card Summary|By Card Summary]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Flashcard module: Edit Screen|Edit Screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* The [https://h5p.org/flashcards flashcards module] and [https://h5p.org/dialog-cards dialog cards] for [https://moodle.org/plugins/mod_hvp H5P] - Free interactive HTML5 flashcards. Create a set of stylish and intuitive flashcards that have images paired with questions and answers. Use this content type with H5P in publishing systems like Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Lesson_module#The_Flash_card_lesson|Flash card presentation]] in the [[Lesson module]] is an alternative to this module.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://docs.activeprolearn.com/en/doku.php?id=:mod:flashcard|Complete original documentation in English]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Medicine]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr: Flashcard]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Módulo flashcard]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=backup/copy&amp;diff=138221</id>
		<title>backup/copy</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=backup/copy&amp;diff=138221"/>
		<updated>2020-08-26T15:03:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: redirect to course copy page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Course_copy]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Universal_Office_Converter_(unoconv)&amp;diff=136782</id>
		<title>Universal Office Converter (unoconv)</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Universal_Office_Converter_(unoconv)&amp;diff=136782"/>
		<updated>2020-03-24T12:16:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Document converters}}&lt;br /&gt;
==What is unoconv?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;unoconv&amp;quot; is a command line program that is used to convert between different office document file formats. It uses an instance of [http://libreoffice.org LibreOffice] to do the conversion and is used by the [[Assignment activity]] to convert documents to pdf so that they can be annotated. If unoconv is not installed - the only impact is that the assignment activities will only allow annotations when students upload a pdf document. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The steps required to install unoconv are different depending on the operating system that you have installed Moodle on. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installing unoconv on Linux ==&lt;br /&gt;
The required version of unoconv is at least 0.7. Depending on your flavour of linux, this may be available in your package manager and you can install it directly with:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Ubuntu 18.04 LTS===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
apt-get install unoconv&lt;br /&gt;
mkdir /var/www/.config&lt;br /&gt;
chown www-data:www-data /var/www/.config&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Ubuntu 16.04 LTS===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
apt-get install unoconv&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your package manager contains an older version of the package, you will have to find a newer version and install it manually ([https://packages.debian.org/stretch/unoconv Debian Testing]). Unoconv itself is just a python script, so it has few dependencies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Potential problems:&lt;br /&gt;
* On some systems the apache user home directory is set to a non existent folder. This can cause unoconv to fail. There are 2 solutions to this - one is to make a (writable) home directory for the apache user (like /home/www-data). The other is to run a unoconv listener (described below) as another user other than the apache user (someone with a valid, writable home directory).&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are still running 14.04LTS then unoconv won&#039;t work as shipped. This might not be the most efficient route but it worked by first installing unoconv (version 0.6) from the package manager as above. You will then need to grab unoconv 0.7 from Github (https://github.com/dagwieers/unoconv), then upgrade to the latest libreoffice using the PPA (https://launchpad.net/~libreoffice/+archive/ubuntu/ppa). Point moodle at the Github version of unoconv. You need to modify the Python unoconv file by changing &#039;python&#039; in the first line to &#039;python3&#039;. You also need to change the permissions on the directory /var/www so that the user www-data can write to it (www-data needs to write to its home directory which it cannot do by default).&lt;br /&gt;
On Debian Stable, the cleanest method to install [https://packages.debian.org/jessie-backports/unoconv unoconv] is using Jessie-backports. First, enable backports repo line in /etc/apt/sources.list:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#### Jessie-backports  ####&lt;br /&gt;
deb http://ftp.debian.org/debian jessie-backports main&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then, update and install unoconv from jessie-backports:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
apt-get update&lt;br /&gt;
apt-get install -t jessie-backports unoconv&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package will bring all necessary dependencies for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Ubuntu 14.04 LTS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) Navigate to opt directory&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
cd /opt&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) Download unoconv&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
sudo wget https://raw.githubusercontent.com/dagwieers/unoconv/master/unoconv&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3) Modify the Python unoconv file by changing &#039;python&#039; in the first line to &#039;python3&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
sudo nano /opt/unoconv&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
eg. &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;#!/usr/bin/env python3&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4) Make unoconv executable&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
sudo chmod ugo+x /opt/unoconv&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5) Add LibreOffice PPA to your system and install the latest version&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
sudo add-apt-repository ppa:libreoffice/ppa&lt;br /&gt;
sudo apt-get update&lt;br /&gt;
sudo apt-get install libreoffice&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6) Change permissions so apache can write to its home directory&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
sudo chown www-data /var/www&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7) From your browser navigate to&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; System paths&#039;&#039; and add the path to unoconv&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
/opt/unoconv&lt;br /&gt;
*Note: if you would like to preserve the default path add a symbolic link to /usr/bin: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
sudo ln -s /opt/unoconv /usr/bin/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8) Navigate to &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Assignment &amp;gt; Feedback plugins &amp;gt; Annotate PDF &amp;gt; Test unoconv path&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You should see: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;The unoconv path appears to be properly configured.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Download the converted pdf test file. (if the PDF fails to load ensure that www-data can write to its home directory: /var/www)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===CentOS / RedHat===&lt;br /&gt;
Just before you start, you might like to consider installing the latest [http://www.tecmint.com/install-libreoffice-on-rhel-centos-fedora-debian-ubuntu-linux-mint/ LibreOffice 6.3.2] directly from RPM packages, that are not part of the distribution you are using.&lt;br /&gt;
As of nov-2016, CentOS and RedHat 7.2 comes with OpenOffice 4.3 . so if you are not interested in using this version and would like to install latest 6.3 independent LibreOffice 6.3 , please remove any openoffice packages you might have on your OS by issuing:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
yum remove openoffice* libreoffice*&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is recommended to chose your localized libreoffice version for better document conversions. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
yum install libreoffice libreoffice-pyuno&lt;br /&gt;
git clone https://github.com/dagwieers/unoconv.git&lt;br /&gt;
# copy &lt;br /&gt;
cp unoconv/unoconv /usr/bin&lt;br /&gt;
# or link unoconv to /usr/bin&lt;br /&gt;
ln -s unoconv/unoconv /usr/bin/unoconv&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 Note: depends on what version you are installing, openoffice or libreoffice, make sure you installed the *-pyuno package. (the headless package is already compiled into the core)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure it is properly configured:&lt;br /&gt;
http://your-moodle/admin/search.php?query=unoconv&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Production servers should consider running unoconv in listener mode, see [[Installing_unoconv#Run_a_unoconv_listener]] or follow directions bellow&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
vi /etc/systemd/system/unoconv.service&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
And then copy and paste the following configuration into it:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[Unit]&lt;br /&gt;
Description=Unoconv listener for document conversions&lt;br /&gt;
Documentation=https://github.com/dagwieers/unoconv&lt;br /&gt;
After=network.target remote-fs.target nss-lookup.target&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[Service]&lt;br /&gt;
Type=simple&lt;br /&gt;
Environment=&amp;quot;UNO_PATH=/usr/lib64/libreoffice/program&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
ExecStart=/usr/bin/unoconv --listener&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[Install]&lt;br /&gt;
WantedBy=multi-user.target&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
And then enable and start the above service&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
systemctl enable unoconv.service&lt;br /&gt;
systemctl start unoconv.service&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If your selinux is enable yous should set &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#setsebool -P httpd_execmem on&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installing unoconv on OS X ==&lt;br /&gt;
Download and install LibreOffice for Mac. Unfortunately - newer versions of LibreOffice are not currently compatible with unoconv for mac and you will have to install LibreOffice 4.2 (Direct download link - https://downloadarchive.documentfoundation.org/libreoffice/old/4.2.5.2/mac/x86_64/LibreOffice_4.2.5.2_MacOS_x86-64.dmg).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Get the latest version of the unoconv python script. One way to do this is with http://brew.sh/ brew.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
brew install unoconv&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you haven&#039;t done it already - install ghostscript. One way to install ghostscript is also with http://brew.sh/ brew&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
brew install ghostscript&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the paths to unoconv and ghostscript in Moodle (&#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; System paths&#039;&#039;). If you used brew, they will both be installed to /usr/local/bin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LibreOffice needs write access to the current users home directory to create some temporary files. When unoconv is run as the webserver user (_www) it does not normally have this permission.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some ways to get around this - one way is just to give the &amp;quot;_www&amp;quot; user write access to /Library/WebServer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another solution is to convince LibreOffice that this users home directory is somewhere else. This can be done by inserting this code into the top of the unoconv python script.&lt;br /&gt;
Code to insert:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Set home to a writable folder. &lt;br /&gt;
os.environ[&#039;HOME&#039;] = &#039;/tmp/&#039;                                                                                                        &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This needs to be inserted at line 36 immediately after the line &amp;quot;exitcode = 0&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installing unoconv on Windows ==&lt;br /&gt;
Download and install LibreOffice for Windows. Open Office will work just as well, but the documentation for unonconv is set to Libre Office. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Download the latest version of the unoconv script from https://github.com/dagwieers/unoconv/releases (download the zip version). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the downloaded zip file - extract the one file &amp;quot;unoconv-0.7\unoconv&amp;quot; (no file extension). This is the unoconv script - none of the other files in the package are required. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rename the downloaded script to &#039;&#039;&#039;unoconv.py&#039;&#039;&#039; and copy it to a folder in either C:\Program Files or C:\Program Files (x 86) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a batch file in the same folder as unoconv.py name it something like &#039;&#039;&#039;unoconv.bat&#039;&#039;&#039;, it must be a batch file, with these contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;@&amp;quot;C:\Program Files\LibreOffice (or Open Office #v)\program\python.exe&amp;quot; c:\unoconv\unoconv.py %*  &amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next, you have to &#039;&#039;&#039;Set paths in Moodle.&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Login as admin and go to &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; System paths&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set:  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Path to Ghostscript (pathtogs) C:\Program Files\gs\gsversion\bin\gswin64c.exe  &amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use gswin32.exe or gswin64.exe, these are not command line programs - use gswin32c.exe or gswin64c.exe. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set:  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Path to Python (pathtopython) to C:\Program Files (x86)\OpenOffice v#(or Libra Office v#)\program\python.exe   &amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Identify in the path whichever program you use and include the full exe name for both Ghostscript and Python.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Save the pathto statements and a green tick should appear if Moodle is communicating with the required files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Document converters and enable &#039;&#039;&#039;Unoconv&#039;&#039;&#039; then select Settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the path statement to &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Path to unoconv document converter : C:\Program Files (x86)\unoconv\unoconv.bat&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Include the full name of the .bat file. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Test ghostscript and unoconv are working correctly in the admin test pages &amp;quot;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Assignment &amp;gt; Feedback plugins &amp;gt; Annotate PDF&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Run a unoconv listener ==&lt;br /&gt;
Unoconv utilises a client/server process when converting documents. By default, when there is no running server process - each time unoconv runs it will start a server process, send its request and shut down the server process when the request is complete. The drawback of this mode is that if 2 requests are submitted simultaneously - this can cause the first request to shutdown the server process when the second request is still in progress - and the second conversion request fails. A more robust way to configure unoconv is to start a server process at boot time, and/or run a script to monitor it and restart it if it crashes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start a unoconv listener at boot time - you need a start up script. Different operating systems and Linux distributions use different startup scripts - but here are some examples of startup scripts for different systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[mod/assign/feedback/editpdf/testunoconv/upstart | Upstart script for Ubuntu based systems]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[mod/assign/feedback/editpdf/testunoconv/launchd | Launchd script for OS X]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[mod/assign/feedback/editpdf/testunoconv/initd | Init script for Debian]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[mod/assign/feedback/editpdf/testunoconv/initdcentos6 | Init script for CentOS/RedHat 6.x]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[mod/assign/feedback/editpdf/testunoconv/systemd | SystemD service script for CentOS/RedHat 7.x]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Offload processing to a different server ==&lt;br /&gt;
Processing office documents can put increased load on your webserver, which may impact on the responsiveness of your site. If you are installing unoconv on a large site you may want to consider running unoconv on a server that is not also serving web requests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to do this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Install unoconv on each webservers and the remote server following the installation instructions above. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure unoconv is started at boot time on the remote server with the &amp;quot;--listener&amp;quot; argument and is monitored and restarted if it exits (see Debian init script for an example of how to do this). By default, unoconv will only listen on localhost (127.0.0.1): if you want to connect to the listener process from another server, you need to start the unoconv listener process with the &amp;quot;--server&amp;quot; argument too!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example command for starting a listener on a remote server (0.0.0.0 listens on all interfaces):&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
unoconv --listener --server 0.0.0.0 --port 2002&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open the firewall port 2002 between the moodle webservers and the machine running unoconv.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Share the moodle data root between the webservers and the machine running unoconv. This folder must be mounted at the same path on all servers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Install a wrapper for unoconv on the webservers that forwards the requests to the remote server. Example:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#!/bin/bash&lt;br /&gt;
# Wrapper script for unoconv to forward processing.&lt;br /&gt;
# Install to /usr/bin/unoconv-remote with 755 permissions&lt;br /&gt;
/usr/bin/unoconv --server=&amp;lt;ip of remote server&amp;gt; &amp;quot;$@&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configure the path to unoconv in the Moodle admin settings to point to this wrapper script.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Additional resources==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://github.com/dagwieers/unoconv GitHub dagwieers/unoconv] has additional information on installation of unoconv and troubleshooting tips.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://webnetkit.com/soffice-bin-using-100-cpu-moodle/ soffice.bin using 100% of CPU MOODLE]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=335310 Is the unoconv installation a security risk?] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Universal Office Converter (unoconv)]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Universal Office Konverter]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Universal Office Converter]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=TeX_notation_filter&amp;diff=136039</id>
		<title>TeX notation filter</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=TeX_notation_filter&amp;diff=136039"/>
		<updated>2019-11-25T11:01:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: /* See also */ Link that works for TeX filters&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Filters}}&lt;br /&gt;
The TeX Filter is a core Moodle filter intended to allow one to convert tex expressions into GIF, PNG or SVG images. The filter relies on some additional binaries to accomplish this for expressions contained between appropriate tokens.  Where these binaries are not available,  Moodle provides for a fallback through the use of  Mimetex. Versions of MimeTex for Linux (glib2.3 32bit), Windows, Mac OS X and FreeBSD are included in the Moodle distribution. There are other technologies available for displaying Tex (see the section on [[Mathematics]] tools for a discussion.)  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;: being based on binaries it requires the availability of three PHP program execution functions: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;exec&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;shell_exec&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;system&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Methods and Usage ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To avoid confusion you should note that the TeX filter has two separate methods for converting the TeX notation to images. The preferred method is a collection of three binaries that you are responsible for installing (if they are not already present,  though many webhosts make these available) and configuring on your server. The filter settings page relates entirely to this method. If this fails for any reason the filter will fall back to a single binary - MimeTeX.  A number of different builds are included in the Moodle distribution for popular operating systems,  though Mimetex and its bigger brother, MathTex are easy enough to compile and install if you have systems administration experience.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before doing anything else, you need to go to &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Filters&#039;&#039; and activate the TeX Notation Filter. If you want to use the Algebra filter (another core filter) since the Algebra Filter is really only a &amp;quot;front end&amp;quot; to the Tex filter,  you should also turn on the Algebra filter.  For more information on the Algebra Filter see the [[Algebra filter]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the filter is turned on and properly configured you can make use of it by&lt;br /&gt;
including a TeX expression delimited by double-dollar signs. Example:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
    $$ \sqrt{x + y} $$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this does not display properly, see the information on debugging.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MimeTeX ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle may use a pre-built MimeTeX binary (located in the filters/tex directory) as a fallback if it can&#039;t properly access dvips, convert and latex binaries. There are a number of different versions for different operating systems. The TeX filter picks the appropriate binary for the detected host operating system (you will need to hack the script if your operating system is not included). Note that your web server needs to be set up with appropriate permissions for running binaries in that location. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [http://www.forkosh.com/mimetexmanual.html MimeTeX manual] is available but is arguably intended for persons with systems administration experience and does not specifically address the Moodle environment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You should only use MimeTeX if installing the full LaTeX system fails or the binaries are not available on your system. The results are not nearly as good.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Compatability with MathJax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Moodle 2.8 onwards, the TeX Notation and MathJaxloader filter may be used in combination.  If both filters are enabled on the page, images will be displayed first by the TeX notation filter, and the MathJax version of the TeX expression will replace a little while later when MathJax has finished loading and processing.  If both filters are available, a teacher may decide which to use in an activity by enabling one and disabling the other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site administration settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: TeX Notation settings link in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Filters &amp;gt; Manage filters&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The TeX filter settings page are primarily intended to adjust the operation of the LaTeX renderer. The defaults for the three path settings are selected according to the detection of the operating system on which Moodle is running. These are simply suggested common values - Moodle does not check that the binaries actually exist at these locations. More recent versions of Moodle show a green tick or a red cross next to the path setting - this shows that the binary exists at that location (only). The settings have no effect on the operation of the MimeTex binary (used if any of these binaries are not found).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Installing the binaries ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This depends on your platform, but for a typical install you are going to need a LaTeX implementation. On modern Linux implementations you should look for the &#039;texlive&#039; package (e.g. &#039;&#039;apt-get install texlive&#039;&#039;) although a Windows version is available (see [http://www.tug.org/texlive/doc/texlive-en/texlive-en.html Tex Live]). It is highly unlikely that you will have all these binaries as part of a standard install. If you cannot find texlive you may have to install LaTeX, Ghostscript and ImageMagick separately. While not endorsed by Moodle.org, a simple installation binary for Windows is [http://miktex.org/| MikTeX].  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The filter settings page will try to guess the most likely location for the binary files depending on the detected platform. If correct, green ticks will appear against each setting. If red crosses appear you will need to check and modify the settings as required. A simple check is made to establish if the binaries exist at the given paths. A tick or a cross is displayed alongside each as a result. Note that this does not check that the application actually works, just that it is there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some systems supply the fonts as separate packages. If you are having problems make sure you have all the fonts you need installed. You may need to track down an &#039;extra&#039; fonts package to get the required maths fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LaTeX preamble ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enables the LaTeX preamble to be specified. The default should work for most users, but you may need to change it to support non-latin character sets etc. Please see the LaTeX documentation for further details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Transparent colour ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This should be set to your normal text background colour. The default setting is #FFFFFF (i.e., white). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Density ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting effects the size of the resulting image. The default setting is 120 pixels, and it produces an image of  reasonable quality, but for some complicated equations, this still may not be enough. It may be that anything less is not going to produce an image of sufficient quality but the image size can be controlled by the TeX encoding when the page is rendered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Path of &#039;&#039;latex&#039;&#039; binary ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Path to standard latex binary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On Unix based systems it is normally &amp;quot;/usr/bin/latex&amp;quot;. On a MacOS X, the path is &amp;quot;/usr/texbin/&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Windows, using MiKTeX, it is usually something like C:\texmf\miktex\bin\latex.exe&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Path of &#039;&#039;dvips&#039;&#039; binary ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Path to standard dvips binary - generally distributed as part of a LaTeX system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On Unix based systems it is normally &amp;quot;/usr/bin/dvips&amp;quot;. On a MacOS X, the path is &amp;quot;/usr/texbin/&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On Windows using MikTeX is is usually something like C:\texmf\miktex\bin\dvips.exe&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Path of &#039;&#039;convert&#039;&#039; binary ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Path to standard convert binary. It is necessary to produce GIF or PNG images from using the latex and dvips binaries. This is distributed as part of the Ghostscript system, or ImageMagick in Linux.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On Unix based systems it is normally &amp;quot;/usr/bin/convert&amp;quot;. On a MacOS X, the path is &amp;quot;/usr/local/bin/&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On a Windows based PC the path is something like C:\Program Files\ImageMagick\convert.exe (for ImageMagick, but something else for GhostScript.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Path of &#039;&#039;dvisvgm&#039;&#039; binary ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This binary is used instead of convert to produce SVG images. This is distributed as part of TeXlive on Linux although it may be require the full or extra packages to be installed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On Unix based systems it is normally &amp;quot;/usr/bin/dvisvgm&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On a Windows based PC  a compiled binary is available from [http://dvisvgm.sourceforge.net/Downloads sourceforge] and can placed in the same directory with the latex binary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Path of &#039;&#039;mimetex&#039;&#039; binary ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this is blank and the binaries above are missing or fail, the TeX filter will attempt to use a mimetex binary distributed with Moodle.  If you have installed mimetex on the server and would rather use it include the path here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Debugging TeX filter ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The TeX filter has a debugging script (which will be much more helpful if you turn on [[Debugging]]) included that should help if you are having problems. The URL will be as follows...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://your.moodle.path/filter/tex/texdebug.php&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can either enter this path explicitly or with appropriate role permissions the TeX images (or more likely incorrectly rendered text, if you need debugging) will link to this. On more recent versions of Moodle you are &#039;&#039;required&#039;&#039; to be logged in as an Administrator to access this facility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://academy.edulabs.org/mod/glossary/print.php?id=764&amp;amp;mode&amp;amp;hook=ALL&amp;amp;sortkey&amp;amp;sortorder&amp;amp;offset=0&amp;amp;pagelimit=10  TeX Filter Glossary] - a [[Glossary|glossary]] you can add to your course which details usage of the supported [[TeX notation]].&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.latex-project.org/ LaTeX] - the LaTeX document preparation system.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.ghostscript.com/ ghostscript] - required to render the image&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.forkosh.com/mimetexmanual.html MimeTeX Manual] - Default TeX notation manual&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.miktex.org/ MikTeX] - LaTeX for Windows systems&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.imagemagick.org/script/index.php ImageMagick] - required to render images for Windows&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using TeX Notation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Advanced Maths Tools]] for Moodle 2.x - SEE - The Next Generation of TeX Tools&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=752 Mathematics tools forum] on moodle.org&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Mathematics]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:TeX-Notation]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Filtro de notación TeX]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Logging&amp;diff=135330</id>
		<title>Logging</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Logging&amp;diff=135330"/>
		<updated>2019-09-05T08:55:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The site administrator can define which log stores are available, and in which order, from &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Logging&amp;gt;Manage log stores.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Available stores are: Standard, Legacy and External database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039; A new Moodle site will have Standard logging enabled and Legacy logging disabled. A site which has been upgraded will have both enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default Standard log is very detailed and should meet most requirements. The Legacy log should be disabled unless you have old custom reports that need it. An External database log store also allows you to connect to an external log database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that if you disable Legacy logs, you won&#039;t be able to look/show/display (existing) Legacy logs, and no new Legacy logs will be generated. This could be a problem for non -standard plugins which still  generate Legacy logs instead of Standard logs. In time it is to be hoped all contributed plugins will use Standard logs. You can disable the legacy store plugin completely OR you can only disable writing to legacy log inside the plugin settings. In the second case, you will be able to read from the log but no new entries will be added. This is also what will be set automatically during upgrade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Write buffer size&amp;quot; is the number of log entries inserted in one batch database operation, which improves performance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:logstores.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Reports&amp;gt;Manage reports&#039;&#039;, the administrator can see which  log stores support which given report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:reportslogstore.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External log stores (logstore_database) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An External database log store also allows you to connect to an external log database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This log storage plugin is responsible for storing and retrieving the logs ([https://docs.moodle.org/dev/Logging_2#Figure1 steps 2 and 3 from Figure 1]).  There is no interface to read or display from it provided with Moodle core.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Logs]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Events list report]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:dev:Event_2 | Developer documentation on Events (giving examples of levels)]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&amp;amp;id=54 Log storage plugins]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Usar bitácoras]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Logging]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Cohort_external_database&amp;diff=134242</id>
		<title>Cohort external database</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/404/en/index.php?title=Cohort_external_database&amp;diff=134242"/>
		<updated>2019-06-06T13:08:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Koen: Created page with &amp;quot;{{Infobox plugin |type = Admin tool |entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/tool_cohortdatabase |tracker = https://github.com/catalyst/moodle-tool_cohortdatabase/issues |discussio...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = Admin tool&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/tool_cohortdatabase&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = https://github.com/catalyst/moodle-tool_cohortdatabase/issues&lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = &lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = Dan Marden, Catalyst IT&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cohort external databaseplugin creates site-level cohorts using a connection to an external database. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Can be triggered via CLI and/or scheduled task.&lt;br /&gt;
* Creates site-level cohorts&lt;br /&gt;
* Synchronises users in cohorts&lt;br /&gt;
* Optionally auto create users&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create an external database (various types supported) containing your users and cohorts (username, firstname, lastname, email, cohort). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the settings of the plugin on moodle/admin/settings.php?section=tool_cohortdatabase and create mappings to the correct fields of your external database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For testing, tick tool_cohortdatabase | debugdb and run the synchronisation script on the command line. In moodle/admin/tool/cohortdatabase/cli, execute: php sync.php. Observe the output for possible errors.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Koen</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>